Operation Manual
FLASH MEMORY MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION
RECEIVER
AVIC-Z110BT
Notice to all users:
This software requires that the navigation system is
properly connected to your vehicle’s parking brake and
depending on your vehicle, additional installation may
be required. For more information, please contact your
Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at
(800) 421-1404.
English
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
3
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
4
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
5
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
6
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
7
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
8
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
Information to User
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled
equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
OET65. This equipment has very low levels of
RF energy that it deemed to comply without
maximum permissive exposure evaluation
(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be in-
stalled and operated with at least 20cm and
more between the radiator and person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
ankles).
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Alteration or modifications carried out without
appropriate authorization may invalidate the
user’s right to operate the equipment.
CAUTION:
USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PER-
FORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
CAUTION:
THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH
THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HA-
ZARD.
FCC ID : AJDK026
IC : 775E-K026
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules
and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation of
this device.
WARNING
MADE IN THAILAND
Handling the cord on this product or cords asso-
ciated with accessories sold with the product will
expose you to chemicals listed on proposition 65
known to the State of California and other govern-
mental entities to cause cancer and birth defect
or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
For Canadian model
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
This transmitter must not be co-located or op-
erated in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
9
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
other means. You shall not use the Software to
operate a service bureau or for any other use
involving the processing of data for other per-
sons or entities.
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-
right, trade secret, patent and other proprie-
tary ownership rights in the Software. The
Software is copyrighted and may not be cop-
ied, even if modified or merged with other pro-
ducts. You shall not alter or remove any
copyright notice or proprietary legend con-
tained in or on the Software.
You may transfer all of your license rights in
the Software, the related documentation and a
copy of this License Agreement to another
party, provided that the party reads and agrees
to accept the terms and conditions of this Li-
cense Agreement.
License Agreement
PIONEER AVIC-Z110BT- for U.S.A.
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN
YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER
ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. (“PIONEER”).
PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDI-
TIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BE-
FORE USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON
THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY USING THE
SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER
PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY
THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFT-
WARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY
THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER( S) (“SUPPLIERS”),
AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV-
ERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’ SEPARATE
TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS
WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS, PLEASE RE-
TURN THE PIONEER PRODUCTS (INCLUDING
THE SOFTWARE, AND ANY WRITTEN MATERI-
ALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS OF RECEIPT OF
THE PRODUCTS, TO THE AUTHORIZED
PIONEER DEALER FROM WHICH YOU PUR-
CHASED THEM. USE OF THE SOFTWARE
SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR CONSENT
TO THE LICENSE AGREEMENT.
2
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
The Software and related documentation are
provided to you “AS IS”. PIONEER AND ITS LI-
CENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2
and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be col-
lectively referred to as “Pioneer”) MAKES AND
YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT-
WARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-
ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR
PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX-
PRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT
ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN-
TIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and
may contain some nonconformities, defects or
errors. Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft-
ware will meet your needs or expectations,
that operation of the Software will be error free
or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer
does not make any representations or warran-
ties regarding the use or results of the use of
the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability
or otherwise.
1
GRANT OF LICENSE
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non
exclusive license to use the software installed
on the Pioneer products (the “Software”) and
the related documentation solely for your own
personal use or for internal use by your busi-
ness, only on such Pioneer products.
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,
port, modify or make derivative works of the
Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose,
publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market
or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in
any manner not expressly authorized by this
agreement. You shall not derive or attempt to
derive the source code or structure of all or
any portion of the Software by reverse engi-
neering, disassembly, decompilation, or any
10
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
3
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
regulations of the United States. If the Soft-
ware has been rightfully obtained by you out-
side of the United States, you agree that you
will not re-export the Software nor any other
technical data received from Pioneer, nor the
direct product thereof, except as permitted by
the laws and regulations of the United States
and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic-
tion in which you obtained the Software.
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-
CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIM-
ITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS, LOST
INCOME, LOST SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPEN-
DITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS
IN CONNECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS
OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULT-
ING FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS
BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD
HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF
SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES
TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVI-
DUALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CON-
TRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLI-
GENCE, STRICT LIABILITY,
MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS.
IF PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE
OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT
PIONEER’S LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED
FIFTY PERCENT (50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY
YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO-
DUCT.
5
TERMINATION
This Agreement is effective until terminated.
You may terminate it at any time by destroying
the Software. The Agreement also will termi-
nate if you do not comply with any terms or
conditions of this Agreement. Upon such ter-
mination, you agree to destroy the Software.
6
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS
If the Software is being acquired by or on be-
half of the United States government or any
other entity seeking or applying rights similar
to those customarily claimed by the United
States government, the Data is licensed with
“Limited Rights”. Utilization of the Software is
subject to the restrictions specified in the
“Rights in Technical Data” clause at DFARS
252.227-7013, or the equivalent clause for non-
defense agencies. Pioneer Electronics (USA)
Inc., 2265 East 220th Street, Long Beach, CA
90810.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim-
itation of incidental or consequential da-
mages, so the above limitation or exclusion
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer
and limitation of liability shall not be applic-
able to the extent that they are prohibited by
any applicable federal, state or local law which
provides that such a disclaimer or limitation
cannot be waived or preempted.
7
MISCELLANEOUS
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer
and you regarding its subject matter. No
change in this Agreement shall be effective
unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer
retailers do not have the authority to change
this Agreement. This Agreement shall be gov-
erned by and construed in accordance with
the internal laws of the State of California. If
any provision of this Agreement is declared in-
valid or unenforceable, the remaining provi-
sions of this Agreement shall remain in full
force and effect.
4
EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES
You agree and certify that neither the Software
nor any other technical data received from
Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, will be
exported outside the United States except as
authorized and as permitted by the laws and
11
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
operate a service bureau or for any other use
involving the processing of data for other per-
sons or entities.
PIONEER AVIC-Z110BT- for Canada
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN
YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER
ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-
right, trade secret, patent and other proprie-
tary ownership rights in the Software. The
Software is copyrighted and may not be cop-
ied, even if modified or merged with other pro-
ducts. You shall not alter or remove any
copyright notice or proprietary legend con-
tained in or on the Software.
You may transfer all of your license rights in
the Software, the related documentation and a
copy of this License Agreement to another
party, provided that the party reads and agrees
to accept the terms and conditions of this Li-
cense Agreement.
(“PIONEER”). PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CARE-
FULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE IN-
STALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY
USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE
PIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE
BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREE-
MENT. THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATA-
BASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER
(S) (“SUPPLIERS”), AND YOUR USE OF THE
DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’
SEPARATE TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED
YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE
TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRO-
DUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND
ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5)
DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO
THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM
WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF
THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE
YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE-
MENT.
2
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
The Software and related documentation are
provided to you “AS IS”. PIONEER AND ITS LI-
CENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2
and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be col-
lectively referred to as “Pioneer”) MAKES AND
YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT-
WARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-
ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR
PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX-
PRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT
ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN-
TIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and
may contain some nonconformities, defects or
errors. Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft-
ware will meet your needs or expectations,
that operation of the Software will be error free
or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer
does not make any representations or warran-
ties regarding the use or results of the use of
the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability
or otherwise.
1
GRANT OF LICENSE
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non
exclusive license to use the software installed
on the Pioneer products (the “Software”) and
the related documentation solely for your own
personal use or for internal use by your busi-
ness, only on such Pioneer products.
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,
port, modify or make derivative works of the
Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose,
publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market
or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in
any manner not expressly authorized by this
agreement. You shall not derive, or attempt to
derive, the source code or structure of all or
any portion of the Software by reverse engi-
neering, disassembly, decompilation, or any
other means. You shall not use the Software to
12
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
3
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
obtained by you outside of Canada, you agree
that you will not re-export the Software nor any
other technical data received from Pioneer,
nor the direct product thereof, except as per-
mitted by the laws and regulations of Canada
and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic-
tion in which you obtained the Software.
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-
CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIM-
ITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS, LOST
SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, IN-
VESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CON-
NECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF
ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULTING
FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS
BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD
HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF
SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES
TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION IN THE AGGRE-
GATE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WAR-
RANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MIS-
REPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS. IF
PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE
OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT
PIONEER’S LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED
FIFTY PERCENT (50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY
YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO-
DUCT.
5
TERMINATION
This Agreement is effective until terminated.
You may terminate it at any time by destroying
the Software. The Agreement also will termi-
nate if you do not comply with any terms or
conditions of this Agreement. Upon such ter-
mination, you agree to destroy the Software.
6
MISCELLANEOUS
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer
and you regarding its subject matter. No
change in this Agreement shall be effective
unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer
retailers do not have the authority to change
this Agreement. This Agreement shall be gov-
erned by and construed in accordance with
the internal laws of the Province of Ontario
and the federal laws of Canada applicable
therein. If any provision of this Agreement is
declared invalid or unenforceable, the remain-
ing provisions of this Agreement shall remain
in full force and effect.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim-
itation of incidental or consequential da-
mages, so the above limitation or exclusion
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer
and limitation of liability shall not be applic-
able to the extent that they are prohibited by
any applicable federal, state or local law which
provides that such a disclaimer or limitation
cannot be waived or preempted.
4
EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES
You agree and certify that neither the Software
nor any other technical data received from
Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, will be
exported outside Canada except as authorized
and as permitted by the laws and regulations
of Canada. If the Software has been rightfully
13
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
CHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AC-
CURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A
Terms and Conditions for the
Tele Atlas Data
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT (THE “AGREE-
MENT”) BETWEEN YOU, THE END USER, AND
TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA, INC. (“Tele
Atlas”). BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELE
ATLAS DATA, YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO ORAL OR WRIT-
TEN ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED
BY TELE ATLAS OR ANY OF ITS AGENTS, EM-
PLOYEES OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS
SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, AND YOU ARE
NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH AD-
VICE OR INFORMATION. THIS DISCLAIMER
OF WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDI-
TION OF THE AGREEMENT.
1
Grant of License.
Tele Atlas grants you a non-transferable, non-
exclusive license to use the map data and
business points of interest information (the
“POIs”), (together, the “Data”) contained on
these discs, solely for personal, non-commer-
cial use and not to operate a service bureau or
for any other use involving the processing of
data of other persons or entities. You may
make one (1) copy of the Data for archival or
backup purposes only but you may not other-
wise copy, reproduce, modify, make derivative
works, derive the structure of or reverse engi-
neer the Data. The Data contains confidential
and proprietary information and materials,
and may contain trade secrets, so you agree to
hold the Data in confidence and in trust and
not to disclose the Data or any portions in any
form, including by renting, leasing, publish-
ing, leasing, sublicensing or transferring the
Data to any third party. You are prohibited
from removing or obscuring any copyright, tra-
demark notice or restrictive legend.
4
Limitation of Liability.
TELE ATLAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DA-
MAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT,
INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR COSTS OF
COVER, LOSS OF USE OR BUSINESS INTER-
RUPTION OR THE LIKE, REGARDLESS OF
WHETHER YOU WERE ADVISED OF THE POS-
SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITH-
STANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY
CONTAINED HEREIN, TELE ATLAS SHALL
HAVE NO MONETARY LIABILITY TO YOU FOR
ANY CAUSE (REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF
ACTION) UNDER OR RELATING TO THIS
AGREEMENT.
5
Termination.
This Agreement will terminate immediately
and automatically, without notice, if you
breach any term of this Agreement. You agree
that in the event of termination of the Agree-
ment, you shall return the Data (including all
documentation and all copies) to Tele Atlas
and its suppliers.
2
Ownership.
The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its li-
censors and they retain all ownership rights in
the Data. You agree not to alter, remove, oblit-
erate, or obscure any copyright notice or pro-
prietary legend contained in or on the Data.
3
Warranty Disclaimer.
THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND
“WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS” AND TELE ATLAS
AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM
ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN-
CLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MER-
14
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
6
Indemnity.
it is agreed that the Data is a trade secret and
a proprietary commercial product and not sub-
ject to disclosure.
You agree to indemnify, defend and hold Tele
Atlas, its Licensors, and its Suppliers (includ-
ing their respective licensors, suppliers, as-
signees, subsidiaries, affiliated companies,
and the respective officers, directors, employ-
ees, shareholders, agents and representatives)
free and harmless from and against any liabili-
ty, loss, injury (including injuries resulting in
death), demand, action, cost, expense, or
claim of any kind or character, including but
not limited to attorney’s fees, arising out of or
in connection with any use or possession by
you of the Data.
If you are an agency, department, or other en-
tity of any State government, the United States
Government or any other public entity or
funded in whole or in part by the United States
Government, then you hereby agree to protect
the Data from public disclosure and to consid-
er the Data exempt from any statute, law, regu-
lation, or code, including any Sunshine Act,
Public Records Act, Freedom of Information
Act, or equivalent, which permits public ac-
cess and/or reproduction or use of the Data.
In the event that such exemption is challenged
under any such laws, this Agreement shall be
considered breached and any and all right to
retain any copies or to use of the Data shall be
terminated and considered immediately null
and void. Any copies of the Data held by you
shall immediately be destroyed. If any court of
competent jurisdiction considers this clause
void and unenforceable, in whole or in part,
for any reason, this Agreement shall be con-
sidered terminated and null and void, in its en-
tirety, and any and all copies of the Data shall
immediately be destroyed.
7
U.S. Government Rights.
If you are an agency, department, or other en-
tity of the United States Government, or
funded in whole or in part by the United States
Government, then use, duplication, reproduc-
tion, release, modification, disclosure or trans-
fer of this commercial product and
accompanying documentation, is restricted in
accordance with the LIMITED or RESTRICTED
rights as described in DFARS 252.227-7014(a)
(1) (JUN 1995) (DOD commercial computer
software definition), DFARS 227.7202-1 (DOD
policy on commercial computer software),
FAR 52.227-19 (JUN 1987) (commercial com-
puter software clause for civilian agencies),
DFARS 252.227-7015 (NOV 1995) (DOD techni-
cal data – commercial items clause); FAR
52.227-14 Alternates I, II, and III (JUN 1987) (ci-
vilian agency technical data and noncommer-
cial computer software clause); and/or FAR
12.211 and FAR 12.212 (commercial item ac-
quisitions), as applicable. In case of conflict
between any of the FAR and DFARS provisions
listed herein and this License, the construc-
tion that provides greater limitations on the
Government’s rights shall control. Contractor/
manufacturer is Tele Atlas North America,
Inc., 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766-
1445. Phone: 603.643. 0330. The Data is
8
Additional Provisions with respect to
POI Data only.
a
b
c
No Creation of Mailing Lists.
You are prohibited from using the POIs (i) to
create mailing lists or (ii) for other such si-
milar uses.
Compliance.
You will use the POIs in compliance with all
applicable federal, state and local laws,
rules and regulations.
Indemnification.
You shall indemnify and hold infoUSA, Inc.
harmless against all third party claims or
liability which are based in whole or in part
of the users failure to comply with such
laws, rules and regulations or which result
from the use of the POIs through you.
Warranty.
©1984-2008 by Tele Atlas. ALL RIGHTS RE-
SERVED. For purpose of any public disclosure
provision under any federal, state or local law,
d
15
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
In addition to the Warranties contained in
the Agreement, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT
THE POIS ARE LICENSED ON AN “AS IS”
BASIS WITHOUT GUARANTEE, AND
THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES
MADE WHETHER, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
or unenforceable, such provision or part there-
of shall be stricken from this Agreement and
the remainder of this Agreement shall be
valid, legal, and enforceable to the maximum
extent possible. Any notice under this Agree-
ment shall be delivered by courier to Tele Atlas
North America, Inc., Attention Contracts De-
partment, 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH
03766 USA. The covenants and obligations un-
dertaken by you herein are intended for the di-
rect benefit of Tele Atlas and may be enforced
by Tele Atlas directly against you.
e
POIs Segregation.
You are prohibited from combining or mer-
ging the POIs with any other POI data. The
POIs shall be maintained in such a way
that they are separately identifiable from all
other POI data at all times.
9
Agreement in English.
The parties hereto confirm that they have re-
quested that this Agreement and all attach-
ments and related documents be drafted in
English.
Les parties ont exigé que le présent contrat et
tous les documents attachés soient rédigés en
Anglais.
10 Miscellaneous.
This is the exclusive and complete Agreement
between Tele Atlas and you regarding its sub-
ject matter. Nothing in this Agreement shall
create a joint venture, partnership or principal-
agent relationship between Tele Atlas and you.
The internal laws of California shall govern
this Agreement and you consent to the juris-
diction of the Northern District of California or
the State of California for the County of Santa
Clara. Sections 2 – 10 shall survive the expira-
tion or termination of this Agreement. This
Agreement may be amended, altered, or modi-
fied only by Tele Atlas. You may not assign any
part of this Agreement without Tele Atlas’ prior
written consent. You acknowledge and under-
stand that the Data may be subject to restric-
tions on exportation and agree to comply with
any applicable export laws. In the event that
any provision or part of a provision of this
Agreement is determined to be invalid, illegal,
16
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
18
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
19
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
Copyright Notices for North
American data
About the database
About the Data for the Map
Database
1
Tele Atlasâ MultiNetâ USA and Canada data.
As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice
for Tele Atlasâ MultiNetâ USA and Canada is:
NOTICE
!
Modifications related to roads, streets/high-
ways, terrain, construction and other things
before/during the development period may
not be reflected in this database. Inevitably,
those modifications after that period are
not reflected in this database.
ã 2006 – 2008 Tele Atlas. All rights reserved.
This material is proprietary and the subject of
copyright protection and other intellectual
property rights owned or licensed to Tele
Atlas. Tele Atlas is an authorized distributor of
selected Statistics Canada computer files
under Agreement number 6776. The product
includes information copied with permission
from Canadian authorities, including ã Cana-
da Post Corporation and GeoBaseâ, and De-
partment of Natural Resources Canada, All
rights reserved. The product is sourced in part
from Geography Division, Statistics Canada,
2006 Road Network File (RNF), 92-500-XWE/
XWF. The incorporation of data sources from
Statistics Canada within this product shall not
be construed as constituting an endorsement
by Statistics Canada of such product. The use
of this material is subject to the terms of a Li-
cense Agreement. You will be held liable for
any unauthorized copying or disclosure of this
material.
!
!
For more details about the map coverage of
this navigation system, refer to the informa-
tion on our website.
It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and use
any part or the whole of this map in any
form without permission from the copyright
owner.
!
!
If the local traffic regulations or conditions
deviate from this data, follow the local traf-
fic regulations (such as signs, indications,
etc.) and conditions (such as construction,
weather, etc.).
The traffic regulation data used in the map
database applies only to standard sized
passenger vehicles. Note that regulations
for larger vehicles, motorbikes, and other
non-standard vehicles are not included in
the database.
2
3
As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice
for all third-party brand icons (the “Brand
Icons”) are located in the operator’s manual
included in the Licensed Products.
As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice
with logo for infoUSA, Inc. is:
Data by
C
Copyright 2009
All Rights Reserved
4
As for Map Version, Tele Atlas. Rel. 07/2008.
20
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
morning only, but you arrive later, it would be
against the traffic regulations so you cannot
drive along the set route. When driving, please
follow the actual traffic signs. Also, the system
may not know some traffic regulations.
Important Safety Information
WARNING
!
Do not attempt to install or service your navi-
gation system by yourself. Installation or servi-
cing of the navigation system by persons
without training and experience in electronic
equipment and automotive accessories may
be dangerous and could expose you to the
risk of electric shock or other hazards.
Before using your navigation system, be sure
to read and fully understand the following
safety information:
p Read the entire manual before operating
this navigation system.
!
If liquid or foreign matter should get inside
this navigation system, park your vehicle to
safe place and turn the ignition switch off
(ACC OFF) immediately and consult your deal-
er or the nearest authorized Pioneer Service
Station. Do not use the navigation system in
this condition because doing so may result in
a fire, electric shock, or other failure.
p The navigation features of your navigation
system (and rear view camera option if pur-
chased) are intended solely as an aid to
you in the operation of your vehicle. It is
not a substitute for your attentiveness,
judgment, and care when driving.
p Do not operate this navigation system (or
the rear view camera option if purchased) if
doing so will divert your attention in any
way from the safe operation of your vehicle.
Always observe safe driving rules and fol-
low all existing traffic regulations. If you ex-
perience difficulty in operating the system
or reading the display, park your vehicle in
a safe location and apply the parking brake
before making the necessary adjustments.
p Never allow others to use the system un-
less they have read and understood the op-
erating instructions.
p Never use this navigation system to route
to hospitals, police stations or similar facil-
ities in an emergency. Stop using any func-
tions relating to the hands-free phone and
please call 911.
p Route and guidance information displayed
by this equipment is for reference purposes
only. It may not accurately reflect the latest
permissible routes, road conditions, one
way streets, road closures, or traffic restric-
tions.
!
If you notice smoke, a strange noise or odor
from the navigation system, or any other ab-
normal signs on the LCD screen, turn off the
power immediately and consult your dealer or
the nearest authorized Pioneer Service Sta-
tion. Using this navigation system in this con-
dition may result in permanent damage to the
system.
!
!
Do not disassemble or modify this navigation
system, as there are high-voltage components
inside which may cause an electric shock. Be
sure to consult your dealer or the nearest
authorized Pioneer Service Station for internal
inspection, adjustments or repairs.
Do not allow this product to come into contact
with liquids. Electrical shock could result.
Also, damage to the product, smoke, and over-
heating could result from contact with liquids.
CAUTION
!
When a route is calculated, the route and
voice guidance for the route are automatically
set. Also, for day or time traffic regulations,
only information about traffic regulations ap-
plicable at the time when the route was calcu-
lated is shown. One-way streets and street
closures may not be taken into consideration.
For example, if a street is open during the
p Traffic restrictions and advisories currently
in force should always take precedence
over guidance given by the navigation sys-
tem. Always obey current traffic restric-
tions, even if the navigation system
provides contrary advice.
21
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
p Failure to set correct information about the
local time may result in the navigation sys-
tem providing improper routing and gui-
dance instructions.
p Never set the volume of your navigation
system so high that you cannot hear out-
side traffic and emergency vehicles.
p To promote safety, certain functions are dis-
abled unless the vehicle is stopped and/or
the parking brake is applied.
p The data encoded in the built-in memory is
the intellectual property of the provider, and
the provider is responsible for such con-
tent.
p Keep this manual handy as a reference for
operating procedures and safety informa-
tion.
Additional Safety Information
Parking brake interlock
Certain functions (such as viewing of DVD-
Video and certain touch key operations) of-
fered by this navigation system could be dan-
gerous and/or unlawful if used while driving.
To prevent such functions from being used
while the vehicle is in motion, there is an inter-
lock system that senses when the parking
brake is set and when the vehicle is moving. If
you attempt to use the functions described
above while driving, they will become disabled
until you stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
apply the parking brake. Please keep the brake
pedal pushed down before releasing the park-
ing brake.
p Pay close attention to all warnings in this
manual and follow the instructions care-
fully.
p Do not install this navigation system where
it may (i) obstruct the driver’s vision, (ii) im-
pair the performance of any of the vehicle’s
operating systems or safety features, in-
cluding air bags or hazard lamp buttons or
(iii) impair the driver’s ability to safely oper-
ate the vehicle.
p Please remember to fasten your seat belt at
all times while operating your vehicle. If
you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe if your
seat belt is not properly buckled.
WARNING
!
LIGHT GREEN LEAD AT POWER CON-
NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT
PARKED STATUS AND MUST BE CON-
NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPLY SIDE
OF THE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH. IM-
PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF
THIS LEAD MAY VIOLATE APPLICABLE
LAW AND MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS IN-
JURY OR DAMAGE.
!
!
To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the
potential violation of applicable laws, the navi-
gation system is not for use with a “Video
image” that is visible to the driver.
In some countries or states the viewing of
“Video image” on a display inside a vehicle
even by persons other than the driver may be
illegal. Where such regulations apply, they
must be obeyed.
When applying the parking brake in order to
view “Video image” or to enable other func-
tions offered by the navigation system, park
your vehicle in a safe place, and keep the
brake pedal pushed down before releasing the
parking brake if the vehicle is parked on a hill
or otherwise might move when releasing the
parking brake.
p Never use headphones while driving.
“GOOG-411” service
p Pioneer does not bear responsibility for the
accuracy of the information.
p Pioneer does not bear responsibility for
changes to information services provided
by related companies, such as cancellation
of services or changing to pay-services.
Also, we do not accept return of the pro-
duct for this reason.
!
22
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
CAUTION
WARNING
Accuracy/performance of interlock may be im-
pacted by such factors as GPS signal detection
and driving habits or conditions of the place
where the vehicle is parked.
!
!
SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR REVERSED.
USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR
IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USE
MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE.
When you attempt to watch “Video image”
while driving, the warning “Viewing of front
seat video source while driving is strictly
prohibited.” will appear on the screen. To
watch “Video image” on this display, stop the
vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking
brake. Please keep the brake pedal pushed
down before releasing the parking brake.
CAUTION
!
!
For safety reasons, the rear view camera func-
tion is not available until the navigation sys-
tem boots up completely.
The rear view mode is to use the navigation
system as an aid to keep an eye on the trailers,
or while backing up. Do not use this function
for entertainment purposes.
When using a display connected
to REAR MONITOR OUTPUT
Notes Before Using the System
Important (Serial Number:)
The serial number of this device is located on the
bottom of this product. For your own security and
convenience, be sure to record this number on
the enclosed warranty card.
The video output terminal (REAR MONITOR
OUTPUT) is for connection of a display to en-
able passengers in the rear seats to watch
video images.
WARNING
NEVER install the Rear Display in a location that
enables the driver to watch video images while
driving.
Failure to operate
Should the navigation system fail to operate
properly, contact your dealer or nearest
authorized Pioneer Service Station.
To avoid battery exhaustion
Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using
this product. Using this product without run-
ning the engine can drain the battery.
WARNING
Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an
ACC position.
Rear view camera
With an optional rear view camera, you are
able to use the navigation system as an aid to
keep an eye on trailers, or backing into a tight
parking spot.
23
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
Manual overview
How to use this manual
Finding the operation procedure for
what you want to do
When you have decided what you want to do,
you can find the page you need from the
“Contents”.
After-sales service for Pioneer products
Please contact the dealer or distributor from
which you purchased the product for after-
sales service (including warranty conditions)
or any other information. In case the necessary
information is not available, please contact the
companies listed below.
Please do not ship your product to the compa-
nies at the addresses listed below for repair
without making advance contact.
Finding the operation procedure from
a menu name
If you want to check the meaning of an item
displayed on the screen, you will find the ne-
the end of the manual.
!
U.S.A
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc.
CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION
P.O. Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760
800-421-1404
!
CANADA
Glossary
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.
CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT
300 Allstate Parkway Markham, Ontario
L3R 0P2
Use the glossary to find the meanings of
terms.
Terminology
1-877-283-5901
Before moving on, take a few minutes to read
the following information about the conven-
tions used in this manual. Familiarity with
these conventions will help you greatly as you
learn how to use your new equipment.
905-479-4411
For warranty information, please see the Lim-
ited Warranty sheet included with your pro-
duct.
!
Buttons on your navigation system are de-
scribed in ALL CAPITAL, BOLD lettering:
e.g.)
Visit Our Web site
Visit us at the following site:
MENU button, MAP button.
Items in different menus, screen titles, and
functional components are described in
bold with double quotation marks “ ”:
e.g.)
“Destination Menu” screen or “AV
Source” screen
Touch panel keys that are available on the
screen are described in bold in brackets [ ]:
e.g.)
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com
!
In Canada
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca
1
Register your product. We will keep the details
of your purchase on file to help you refer to
this information in the event of an insurance
claim such as loss or theft.
!
!
2
3
Receive updates on the latest products and
technologies.
Download owner’s manuals, order product
catalogs, research new products, and much
more.
[Destination], [Settings].
Extra information, alternatives and other
notes are presented in the following for-
mat:
4
Receive notices of software upgrades and
software updates.
e.g.)
p If the home location has not been stored
yet, set the location first.
24
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Introduction
01
!
References are indicated like this:
e.g.)
= For details, refer to How to use the navi-
gation menu screens on page 34.
Notice regarding DVD-
Video viewing
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims
of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights owned by Macrovision
Definitions of terminology
Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing
uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering
or disassembly is prohibited.
“Front Display” and “Rear Display”
In this manual, the screen that is attached to
the body of this navigation unit will be referred
to as the “Front Display”. Any additional op-
tional screen that is purchased for use in con-
junction with this navigation unit will be
referred to as the “Rear Display”.
“Video image”
Notice regarding MP3 file
usage
“Video image” in this manual indicates mov-
ing images of DVD-Video, DivXâ, iPod, and any
equipment that is connected to this system
with an RCA cable, such as general-purpose
AV equipment.
Supply of this navigation system conveys only
a license for private, non-commercial use and
does not convey a license nor imply any right
to use this product in any commercial (i.e. rev-
enue-generating), real time broadcasting (ter-
restrial, satellite, cable and/or any other
media), broadcasting/streaming via internet,
intranets and/or other networks or in other
electronic content distribution systems, such
as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applica-
tions. An independent license for such use is
required. For details, please visit
“External storage device (USB, SD)”
The SD memory card, SDHC memory card
and USB memory device are collectively re-
ferred to as the “external storage device (USB,
SD)”. If it indicates the USB memory only, it is
referred to as the “USB storage device”.
“SD memory card”
http://www.mp3licensing.com.
The SD memory card and SDHC memory card
are collectively referred to as the “SD memory
card”.
iPod compatibility
This product supports only the following iPod
models and iPod software versions. Others
may not work correctly.
Notice regarding video
viewing
Remember that use of this system for com-
mercial or public viewing purposes may con-
stitute an infringement on the author’s rights
as protected by the Copyright Law.
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
iPod nano first generation; Ver. 1.3.1
iPod nano second generation; Ver. 1.1.3
iPod nano third generation; Ver. 1.1.3
iPod nano fourth generation; Ver. 1.0.3
iPod fifth generation; Ver. 1.3
iPod classic; Ver. 2.0.1
iPod touch first generation; Ver. 2.2.1
iPod touch second generation; Ver. 2.2.1
25
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
01
Introduction
!
!
iPhone; Ver. 2.2.1
iPhone 3G; Ver. 2.2.1
Notes on internal memory
Before removing the vehicle
battery
p In this manual, iPod and iPhone will be re-
ferred to as iPod.
p When you use this navigation system with
a Pioneer USB interface cable for iPod (CD-
IU50V) (sold separately), you can control an
iPod compatible with this navigation sys-
tem.
p To obtain maximum performance, we re-
commend that you use the latest software
for the iPod.
If the battery is disconnected or discharged,
the memory will be erased and must be repro-
gramed.
tings before you operate this function.
= For more detailed information about the
items which would be erased, refer to
p Operation methods may vary depending on
the iPod models and the software version
of iPod.
p For more details about iPod compatibility
with this navigation system, refer to the in-
formation on our website.
p iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
p iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Data subject to erasure
The information is erased by disconnecting
the yellow lead from the battery (or removing
the battery itself). However, some items re-
main.
tings before you operate this function.
= For more detailed information about the
items which would be erased, refer to
Map coverage
For more details about the map coverage of
this navigation system, refer to the information
on our website.
Protecting the LCD panel
and screen
p Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the
LCD screen when this product is not being
used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight
can result in LCD screen malfunction due
to the resulting high temperatures.
p When using a cellular phone, keep the an-
tenna of the cellular phone away from the
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the
video in the form of spots, colored stripes,
etc.
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be
sure to touch the touch panel keys with
your finger and gently touch the screen.
26
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Basic operation
02
Checking part names and functions
This chapter gives information about the
names of the parts and the main features
using the buttons.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
9
1 LCD screen
2 OPEN CLOSE button
3 TRK (c/d) button
Press to perform manual seek tuning, fast
forward, reverse and track search controls.
27
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
02
Basic operation
= For more details, refer to the descriptions
Adjusting the LCD panel angle
from Chapter 14 to Chapter 30.
WARNING
4 MODE button
When opening, closing and adjusting the angle
of the LCD panel, be careful not to get your finger
caught.
!
Press to switch between the map screen
and the AV operation screen.
Press to display the map screen while
the navigation function screen is dis-
played.
!
CAUTION
Do not open and close the LCD panel with hands
by force. This may cause malfunction.
!
Press and hold to display the “Picture
Adjustment” screen.
1
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.
The “Monitor Setup” screen appears.
5 HOME button
!
Press the HOME button to display the
“Top Menu”.
!
Press to switch between the “Classic
Menu” and the “Shortcut Menu” while
the “Top Menu” is displayed.
Press and hold to turn off the screen dis-
play.
!
6 VOL (+/–) button
Adjusts the AV (Audio and Video) source vo-
lume.
2
3
Touch
Touch
or
.
to adjust the angle.
p The adjusted angle of the LCD panel will be
memorized and the LCD panel will automa-
tically return to that angle the next time the
LCD panel is opened or closed.
7 VOICE button
Press the VOICE button to activate voice op-
erations.
Press and hold the VOICE button to switch
the AV source to mute.
Inserting and ejecting a disc
8 Disc loading slot
Insert a disc to play.
= For details concerning operations, refer
WARNING
!
!
When opening, closing and adjusting the
angle of the LCD panel, be careful not to get
your finger caught.
9 SD card slot
Do not use with the LCD panel left open. If
LCD panel is left open, it may result in injury
in the event of an accident.
CAUTION
Do not open and close the LCD panel with
hands by force. This may cause malfunction.
!
28
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Basic operation
02
!
!
Do not operate this navigation system until
the LCD panel completely opens or closes. If
this navigation system is operated while the
LCD panel is opening or closing, the LCD
panel may stop at that angle for safety.
Do not place a glass or a can on this naviga-
tion system when the LCD panel is open.
Doing so may break this navigation system.
Ejecting a disc
1
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.
The “Monitor Setup” screen appears.
2
Touch [Disc Eject].
The LCD panel opens, and the disc is ejected.
3
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.
The LCD panel closes.
Inserting a disc
1
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.
Inserting and ejecting an
SD memory card
The “Monitor Setup” screen appears.
CAUTION
!
!
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-
tion system while data is being transferred.
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-
rage device for any reason, it is usually not
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts
no liability for damages, costs or expenses
arising from data loss or corruption.
2
Touch [Open].
The LCD panel opens, and the disc loading
slot appears.
!
!
Do not press the OPEN CLOSE button when
the SD memory card is not fully inserted.
Doing so may damage the card.
Do not press the OPEN CLOSE button before
the SD memory card has been completely re-
moved. Doing so may damage the card.
Press the middle of the SD memory card
gently and pull out straight.
3
Insert a disc into the disc loading slot.
p This system is not compatible with Multi
Media Card (MMC).
p Compatibility with all SD memory cards is
not guaranteed.
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-
mance with some SD memory cards.
p Do not insert anything other than a disc
into the disc loading slot.
Inserting an SD memory card
4
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.
The LCD panel closes.
1
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.
The “Monitor Setup” screen appears.
29
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
02
Basic operation
2
Touch [SD Insert].
2
Touch [Eject SD].
The LCD panel opens, and the SD card slot ap-
pears.
The following message appears.
3
Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
Insert it with the label surface facing to the up-
side and press the card until it clicks and com-
pletely locks.
3
Touch [Yes].
The navigation system restarts, and then the
LCD panel opens.
4
5
6
Press the SD memory card until it clicks.
Pull out the SD memory card.
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.
The LCD panel closes, and then the navigation
system restarts.
4
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.
The LCD panel closes, and then the navigation
system restarts.
p If the SD memory card only contains music
files or video files, the navigation system
will not be restarted.
Plugging and unplugging a
USB storage device
CAUTION
!
!
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-
tion system while data is being transferred.
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-
rage device for any reason, it is usually not
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts
no liability for damages, costs or expenses
arising from data loss or corruption.
Ejecting an SD memory card
1
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.
The “Monitor Setup” screen appears.
30
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Basic operation
02
p A USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU50V)
Plugging in a USB storage device
(sold separately) is required for connection.
%
Plug a USB storage device into the USB
connector.
1
Pull out the USB storage device after
checking that no data is being accessed.
USB connector
USB storage device
p Compatibility with all USB storage device is
not guaranteed.
This navigation system may not achieve op-
timum performance with some USB sto-
rage devices.
USB connector
USB interface cable
for iPod
p Connection via USB hub is not possible.
p For more details about iPod compatibility
with this navigation system, refer to the in-
formation on our website.
Unplugging a USB storage device
p Connection via USB hub is not possible.
%
Pull out the USB storage device after
checking that no data is being accessed.
2
Connect your iPod.
Connecting and
Disconnecting your iPod
disconnecting an iPod
%
Pull out the USB interface cable for iPod
after checking that no data is being ac-
cessed.
CAUTION
!
!
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-
tion system while data is being transferred.
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-
rage device for any reason, it is usually not
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts
no liability for damages, costs or expenses
arising from data loss or corruption.
Flow from startup to
termination
1
Start the engine to boot up the system.
After a short pause, the splash screen comes
on for a few seconds.
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be
sure to touch the touch panel keys with
your finger and gently touch the screen.
Connecting your iPod
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-
tion system.
31
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
02
Basic operation
2
Turn off the vehicle engine to termi-
4
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking
nate the system.
The navigation system is also turned off.
its details, and then touch [OK] if you
agree to the conditions.
On first-time startup
When you use the navigation system for the
first time, select the language that you want to
use.
1
Start the engine to boot up the system.
After a short pause, the splash screen comes
on for a few seconds.
2
Touch the language that you want to
use on the screen.
3
Touch the language that you want to
Regular startup
use for the voice guidance.
%
Start the engine to boot up the system.
After a short pause, the splash screen comes
on for a few seconds.
p The screen shown will differ depending on
the previous conditions.
p When there is no route, the disclaimer ap-
pears after the navigation system reboots.
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to
the conditions.
The navigation system will now restart.
p If the anti-theft function is activated, you
must enter your password.
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to
the conditions.
32
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Basic operation
02
33
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
How to use the navigation menu screens
03
Press the MODE button to display the naviga-
tion map screen.
7 AV operation screen
What you can do on each
menu
1 Top Menu
This is the screen that normally appears when
you play the AV source. Touching the icon on
the top left corner displays the “AV Source”
menu.
Press the HOME button to display the “Top
Menu”.
This is the starting menu to access the desired
screens and operate the various functions.
There are two types of the “Top Menu”.
p To return to the previous screen, touch
.
Operating list screens (e.g.
POI list)
1
4
5
2
3
Classic Menu
1 Screen title
2
Touching or on the scroll bar scrolls
through the list and allows you to view the re-
maining items.
Shortcut Menu
3
Returns the previous screen.
4 Listed items
p In this manual, “Classic Menu” will be
referred to as “Top Menu”.
2 Destination Menu
Touching an item on the list allows you to nar-
row down the options and proceed to the next
operation.
You can search for your destination on this
menu. You can also check or cancel your set
route from this menu.
5
If all of the characters cannot be displayed
within the displayed area, touching the key to
the right of the item allows you to see remain-
ing characters.
3 Phone Menu
You can access the screen that is related to
hands-free phoning to see call histories and
change the settings on the Bluetooth wireless
technology connection.
4 AV Source menu
Shortcut menu
You can access the screen for selecting the
audio and visual source to play.
5 Settings Menu
You can access the screen to customize set-
tings.
6 Map screen
Registering your favorite menu items in short-
cuts allows you to quickly jump to the regis-
tered menu screen by a simple touch on the
“Shortcut Menu” screen.
35
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
03
How to use the navigation menu screens
Selecting the Shortcut
p Up to 15 menu items can be registered in
Displaying the rear view
camera image
Rear view image is displayed on the left-hand
side of the screen, while the map of your sur-
roundings is indicated on the right.
shortcuts.
1
Press the HOME button repeatedly to
display the “Shortcut Menu” screen.
2
Touch [Shortcut].
The Short-Cut Selection screen appears.
1
Press the HOME button to display the
“Top Menu”.
2
Touch [Settings].
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.
3
Touch [System Settings].
The “System Settings” screen appears.
4
Touch [Back Camera].
Scroll bar
The “Back Camera Settings” screen appears.
3
Touch the tab on the right edge or scroll
5
Touch [Camera] to turn it [On].
the bar to display the icon that you want
to set to shortcut.
4
Touch and hold the icon that you want
to add to shortcut.
5
Move the icon to the left side of the
screen, and then release it.
The selected item is added to shortcut.
Canceling the Shortcut
1
Touch and hold the icon that you want
to cancel the shortcut.
2
Move the icon to the right side of the
screen, and then release it.
36
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
How to use the map
04
Most of the information provided by your navigation system can be seen on the map. You need to be-
come familiar with how information appears on the map.
How to read the map screen
This example shows an example of a 2D map screen.
1
h
g
f
2
e
d
c
b
3
4
5
6
a
7
8
9
p Information with the mark (*) appears only
when the route is set.
p Touching this item enables you to hear
the next guidance again.
p Depending on the conditions and settings,
some items may not be displayed.
1 Name of the street to be used (or next gui-
dance point)*
2 Next direction of travel*
When you approach a guidance point, this
item appears.
4 Second Maneuver Arrow*
Shows the turning direction after next and the
distance to there.
5 Zoom in/Zoom out
Touching
displays touch panel keys for
As you get closer to the guidance point, the
color of the item changes to green.
p Touching this item enables you to hear
the next guidance again.
p You can select between display and
non-display.
changing the map scale and the map orienta-
tion.
6 Current position
Indicates the current location of your vehicle.
The apex of the triangular mark indicates your
orientation and the display moves automati-
cally as you drive.
p The apex of the triangular mark is the
proper current position.
3 Distance to the guidance point*
Shows the distance to the next guidance
point.
7 Street name (or city name) that your vehi-
cle is traveling along
37
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
04
How to use the map
!
!
Estimated time of arrival at your des-
tination or waypoint*
8 Extension tab for the AV information bar
Touching this tab opens the AV information
bar and enables you to briefly view the current
status on the AV source. Touching it again re-
tracts the bar.
9 Shortcut to the AV operation screen
The AV Source currently selected is shown.
Touching the indicator displays the AV opera-
tion screen of the current source directly.
p If you connect your iPod to this naviga-
tion system, the artwork for the album
that is playing appears.
The estimated time of arrival is an ideal
value calculated based on the value set
for [Speed] and the actual driving
speed. The estimated time of arrival is
only a reference value, and does not
guarantee arrival at that time.
Travel time to your destination or
waypoint*
h Current time
Meaning of guidance flags
: Destination
a Quick Access icon
Displays Quick Access menu.
b Map orientation indicator
The checkered flag indicates your
destination.
: Waypoint
The blue flags indicate your way-
points.
: Guidance point
The next guidance point (next turn-
ing point, etc.) is shown by a yel-
low flag.
!
When “North up” is selected, is dis-
played.
!
When “Heading up” is selected,
displayed.
is
p The red arrow indicates north.
c Current route*
The route currently set is highlighted in bright
color on the map. If a waypoint is set on the
route, the route after the next waypoint is
highlighted in another color.
Displaying the AV information bar
You can check the current status on the se-
lected AV source.
d Direction line*
%
Touch
.
The direction towards your destination (next
waypoint, or cursor) is indicated with a
straight line.
AV information bar appears.
e Voice icon
This icon shows when the voice operation is
active.
f Bluetooth Connected icon
This icon shows whether the device featuring
Bluetooth technology is connected or not. You
can select between display and non-display.
= For more details about “Selecting dis-
play or non-display for the Bluetooth
#
Touch the AV information bar.
The AV information bar is retracted.
g Multi-Info window
Each touch of [Multi-Info window] changes
the display information.
!
Distance to the destination (or dis-
tance to waypoint)*
38
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
How to use the map
04
2 Freeway exit information
Displays the freeway exit.
3 Freeway signs
Enlarged map of the intersection
When “Close Up View” in the “Map Settings”
screen is “On”, an enlarged map of the inter-
section appears.
These show the road number and give direc-
tional information.
p If the data for these items is not contained
in the built-in memory, the information is
not available even if there are the signs on
the actual road.
Operating the map screen
Changing the scale of the map
You can change the map scale between 25
yard and 1 000 miles (25 meters and 2 000 kilo-
meters).
Display during freeway driving
1
2
Display the map screen.
In certain locations of the freeway, lane infor-
mation is available, indicating the recom-
mended lane to be in to easily maneuver the
next guidance.
Touch
on the map screen.
with the map scale appear.
and
1
3
Touch
or
to change the map
scale.
While driving on the freeway, freeway exit
numbers and freeway signs may be displayed
when in the vicinity of interchanges and exits.
p If you do not operate the function for a few
seconds, the display is automatically re-
turned.
2
3
#
Touch the direct scale key to change the map
to the selected scale directly.
Switching the map orientation
You can switch the vehicle’s direction on the
map between “Heading up” and “North up”.
!
Heading up:
1 Lane information
39
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
04
How to use the map
The map display always shows the vehicle’s
direction as proceeding toward the top of
the screen.
2
Touch and drag the map in the desired
direction to scroll.
!
North up:
The map display always has north at the
top of the screen.
p The map orientation is fixed at “North up”
in the following situation.
1
— When the map scale is 25 miles (50 kilo-
meters) or more.
p The map orientation is fixed at “Heading
up” in the following situation.
2
1 Cursor
— When the 3D map screen is displayed.
2 Distance from the current position
Positioning the cursor to the desired location
results in a brief informational overview about
the location being displayed at the bottom of
screen, with street name and other informa-
tion for this location being shown. (The infor-
mation shown varies depending on the
position.)
1
2
Display the map screen.
Touch
on the map screen.
or
appears.
p The scrolling increment depends on your
dragging length.
#
Touch
.
The map returns to the current position.
p Pressing MODE button returns the map to
the current position.
3
Touch
or
to switch the vehicle’s
Quick Access
direction.
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
“Quick Access” allow you to perform various
tasks, such as route calculation for the loca-
tion indicated by the scroll cursor or register-
ing a location in [Favorites], faster than using
the navigation menu.
p If you do not operate the function for a few
seconds, the display is automatically re-
turned.
You can customize “Quick Access” displayed
on screen. The “Quick Access” described here
are prepared as the default setting.
Scrolling the map to the
position you want to see
1
Display the map screen.
p Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot
be removed from Quick Access menu.
40
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
How to use the map
04
%
When the map is displayed, touch
.
[Close]
Hides the Quick Access menu.
Quick Access menu
: Route Options*
Displayed when the map is not scrolled. This
item can be selected only during route gui-
dance.
You can modify the conditions for route calcu-
lation and recalculate the current route.
: Destination*
Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the
route to the place specified with the scroll cur-
sor.
: Registration
Register information on the location indicated
by the scroll cursor to “Favorites”.
: Vicinity Search
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of
the scroll cursor.
: Overlay POI
Displays icons for surrounding facilities (POI)
on the map.
: Volume
Displays the “Volume Settings” screen.
= For more details about “Volume”, refer to
: Contacts
Displays the “Contacts List” screen.
41
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
05
Customizing the map screen settings
The general settings related with a map screen
can be customized.
To customize the map screen, display the
“Map Settings” screen.
Setting “Close Up View”
This setting enables switching to an enlarged
map around the point where your vehicle is
approaching an intersection, entrance/exit of
freeway or a junction.
1
Display the “Top Menu” screen.
%
Touch [Close Up View].
2
Touch [Settings].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.
!
[On] (default):
Switches to an enlarged map.
Displays the close up view with the 2D map.
[Off]:
!
Does not switch to an enlarged map.
City Map
You can select whether to display the city map
when in certain metropolitan city areas.
p The city map is displayed when the map
scale is 0.05 mile (50 meters) or less.
3
Touch [Map Settings].
The “Map Settings” screen appears.
%
Touch [City Map].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
!
!
[On] (default):
Automatically switches to the city map
when in a city map area.
[Off]:
Does not show the city map.
p Even if you switch [City Map] to [On],
city map cannot display in areas where
there is no city map data.
Setting the Item on the
Map Screen
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.
Setting the switching of the
city map display
Sets whether to switch to the city map display
when the vehicle is within a city map area.
2
Touch [Displayed Info].
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.
%
Touch [City Map Barrier].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
!
[On] (default):
Displays a city map when the vehicle enters
the area of the city map.
[Off]:
!
42
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing the map screen settings
05
Displays a city map when the area dis-
played on the map falls entirely within the
city map area.
%
Touch [Current Street Name].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
!
[View] (default):
Displays the street name (or city name) on
the map.
Show Traffic Incident
Selects whether to display or hide the traffic
notification icons on the map when incidents
occur on your route.
!
[Hide]:
Hides the street name (or city name) on the
map.
%
Touch [Show Traffic Incident].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
Setting the Favorites icon display
You can select whether to display the “Favor-
ites” icon on the map.
p Favorites icons are displayed when the
map scale is 10 mile (20 kilometers) or less.
!
[View] (default):
Displays the icons on the map.
[Hide]:
!
Hides the icons on the map.
%
Touch [Favorites Icon].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
!
!
[On] (default):
Displays the “Favorites” icon on the map.
[Off]:
Bluetooth Connected
Selects whether to display or hide the icon for
current status of the phone connection via
Bluetooth wireless technology.
Hides the “Favorites” icon on the map.
%
Touch [Bluetooth Connected].
3D Land Mark
You can select whether to display the 3D Land-
mark on the map.
p 3D Landmark only appears when the view
mode is [3D View] and the map scale is
set to 0.25 mile (200 m) or lower.
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
!
[View] (default):
Displays the Bluetooth Connected icon on
the map.
[Hide]:
!
Hides the Bluetooth Connected icon on
the map.
%
Touch [3D Land Mark].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
= For more details about “Bluetooth Con-
ting.
!
!
[On] (default):
Displays the 3D Landmark on the map.
[Off]:
Hides the 3D Landmark on the map.
Setting the current street name
display
Selects whether to display or hide the street
name (or city name) that your vehicle is travel-
ing along.
Displaying maneuvers
Selects whether to display or hide the next
turn ahead of the vehicle on the map.
43
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
05
Customizing the map screen settings
%
Touch [Show Manuever].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
!
[View] (default):
Displays the next turn ahead of the vehicle
on the map.
!
[Hide]:
Hides the next turn ahead of the vehicle on
the map.
3
4
Touch [Display] to turn it [On].
p If you do not want to display the POI icon
on the map, touch [Display] to turn it [Off].
(Even if [Display] is turned [Off], the POI
selection setting is retained.)
MSN Direct
Selects whether to display or hide the received
MSN Direct information on the map.
p Following informations are displayed:
— Gas Prices
Touch [POI].
The “Overlay POI (Main Category)” screen
appears.
— Movie Times
— Local Events
p MSN Direct icons are not displayed when
the map scale is 0.75 mile (1 kilometers) or
more.
%
Touch [MSN Direct].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
!
[On] (default):
Displays the icons on the map.
[Off]:
Hides the icons on the map.
!
5
play.
Touch the category you want to dis-
A list of subcategories under the selected
main category appears.
Displaying POI on the map
Displays icons for the surrounding facilities
(POI) on the map.
p POI icons are not displayed when the map
scale is 0.75 mile (1 kilometers) or more.
Displaying preinstalled POIs on
the map
p You can select up to 10 items from the de-
#
Touch [OK].
Returns previous screen.
tailed category.
6
Touch the subcategory.
1
2
Display the “Map Settings” screen.
A red check mark appears next to the selected
category. To cancel the selection, touch the
entry again.
Touch [Overlay POI].
The “Overlay POI” screen appears.
44
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing the map screen settings
05
#
If you want to search with more detailed cate-
gories, touch [Detail].
Touch the item and touch [OK]. When only a few
types of the detailed categories are selected, blue
check marks will appear.
4
5
Touch [Display] to turn it [On].
p If you do not want to display the POI icon
on the map, touch [Display] to turn it [Off].
(Even if [Display] is turned [Off], the POI
selection setting is retained.)
p When subcategory is selected, [Detail] is
Touch [Custom POI].
not available.
The list of POI categories appears.
7
Touch [OK].
Returns previous screen.
8
To finish the selection, touch [OK].
Displaying the customized POIs
Creating a customized POI is possible by
using the utility program “AVIC FEEDS” which
is available separately, on your PC. (“AVIC
FEEDS” will be available on our website.) Stor-
ing the customized POI properly and inserting
the SD memory card enables the system to
display the icons on the map screen.
p You can select up to 10 items from the de-
tailed category.
6
play.
Touch the category you want to dis-
7
To finish the selection, touch [OK].
Switching the view mode
Various types of screen displays can be se-
lected for navigation guidance.
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
2D map screen
2
3
Display the “Map Settings” screen.
Touch [Overlay POI].
The “Overlay POI” screen appears.
45
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
05
Customizing the map screen settings
p This type is available when [Back Cam-
3D map screen
Street View
Rear View
era Settings] is set to [On].
Setting the map color change
between day and night
To improve the visibility of the map during the
evening, you can set the timing for changing
the combination of the map color.
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.
2
Touch [Day/Night Display].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
!
[Automatic] (default):
You can change the colors of a map be-
tween daytime and nighttime according to
whether the vehicle lights are On or Off.
[Day]:
!
The map is always displayed with daytime
colors.
p To use this function with [Automatic], the
Orange/white lead of the navigation system
must be connected correctly.
1
2
Display the “Map Settings” screen.
Changing the road color
You can set the road color to bluish or reddish.
Touch [View Mode].
The “View Mode” screen appears.
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.
3
Touch the type that you want to set.
2
Touch [Road Color].
You can select the following types:
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
!
!
!
[2D View] (default):
Displays the 2D map screen.
[3D View]:
Displays the 3D map screen.
[Street View]:
!
[Blue] (default):
Changes to blue based road colors.
[Red]:
!
Changes to red based road colors.
Displays the “Street View” screen.
p This type is available when the route is
set.
!
[Rear View]:
Displays the rear view images.
46
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing the map screen settings
05
: Overlay POI*
Displays icon for surrounding facilities
(POI) on the map.
Changing the setting of
navigation interruption screen
Set whether to automatically switch to the na-
vigation screen from the AV operation screen
when your vehicle approaches a guidance
point such as an intersection while displaying
a screen other than navigation.
!
!
!
: Volume*
Displays the “Volume Settings” screen.
= For more details about “Volume”, refer
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.
2
Touch [AV Guide Mode].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
: Contacts*
Displays the “Contacts List” screen.
: Whole Route Overview
Displays the entire route (currently set).
= For details, refer to Chapter 7.
: Stock Info
!
[On] (default):
Switches from the audio operation screen
to the navigation screen.
[Off]:
!
!
!
Does not switch the screen.
Displays stock prices.
: Traffic On Route
Displays a list of traffic information on the
route.
: Traffic Events
Displays a list of traffic events information.
Selecting “Quick Access”
Select items to display on the map screen. In
the list displayed on screen, the items with red
checks are displayed on the map screen.
Touch the item you want to display and then
touch [OK] when a red check appears. You
can select up to five items.
!
!
!
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.
2
Touch [Quick Access Selection].
The “Quick Access Selection” screen appears.
: Day/Night Display
Switches Day/Night Display setting.
3
Touch the item that you want to set in
“Quick Access”.
You can select the following items:
p Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show
that these are default or factory settings.
!
: Favorites Icon
Switches Favorites Icon setting.
!
: Registration*
Register information on the location indi-
cated by the scroll cursor to “Favorites”.
4
To finish the setting, touch [OK].
!
: Vicinity Search*
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity
of the scroll cursor.
47
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
06
Setting a route to your destination
8
Your navigation system sets the route
CAUTION
to your destination, and the map of your
surroundings appears.
For safety reasons, these route-setting functions
are not available while your vehicle is in motion.
To enable these functions, you must stop in a
safe place and put on the parking brake before
setting your route.
9
After releasing the parking brake, drive
in accordance with navigation guidance.
p Some information regarding traffic regula-
tions depends on the time when the route
calculation is performed. Thus, the infor-
mation may not correspond with a certain
traffic regulation when your vehicle actually
passes through the location in question.
Also, the information on the traffic regula-
tions provided will be for a passenger vehi-
cle, and not for a truck or other delivery
vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic
regulations when driving.
Checking the location on
the map
After searching for the destination, the “Loca-
tion confirmation screen” appears.
Location confirmation screen
The basic flow of creating
your route
%
Touch [OK].
1
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and
The destination is set, and then route calcula-
apply the parking brake.
tion starts.
p If you press MODE button during route cal-
culation, the calculation is canceled and
the map display appears.
2
3
Display the “Top Menu” screen.
Select the method of searching for your
#
Touch [Scroll].
destination.
The map display changes to the scroll mode. You
can fine-tune the location in the scroll mode, and
then you can set the location as your destination
or do various operations.
Touch [Waypoint].
The location is added to the “Waypoints List”
= For details, refer to Chapter 8.
4
Enter the information about your desti-
nation to calculate route.
#
5
Confirm the location on the map.
screen.
p If a destination is not set, [Waypoint] is not
available.
6
The navigation system calculates the
route to your destination, and then shows
the route on the map.
Checking the calculated route
After the destination is set, route calculation
starts.
7
Check and decide the route.
48
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Setting a route to your destination
06
When the route calculation is completed,
“Route confirmation screen” appears.
Modifying the route
calculation conditions
You can modify the conditions for route calcu-
lation and recalculate the current route.
Route confirmation screen
1
Touch [Options] on the “Route confir-
mation screen”.
The “Route Options” screen appears.
1
2
3
4
1 Travel time to your destination
2 Distance to the destination
3 Estimated fuel cost to your destination
2
Touch the desired items to change the
route calculation conditions and then
touch [OK].
4 Route calculation condition
The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-
mation screen” appears.
%
Touch [OK].
Sets the displayed route as your route, and
starts the route guidance.
#
Touch
.
Items that users can operate
Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show that
these are default or factory settings.
The message confirming whether to cancel the
calculated route appears.
Touch [Yes] to cancel the calculated route, and
then the map screen appears.
Route Condition
This setting controls how the route should be
calculated by taking into account the time or
the distance or the main road.
Determines which condition takes priority for
route calculation.
Display multiple routes
You can select a desired route from multiple
route options. Calculated routes are shown in
different colors.
[Fast]*:
p If you set waypoints, you cannot use the
multiple route option.
Calculates a route with the shortest travel time
to your destination as a priority.
[Short]:
Calculates a route with the shortest distance
to your destination as a priority.
[Main Road]:
1
Touch [Multiple Route].
The “Multiple Route Option” screen appears.
2
Touch to
.
Calculate a route that passes major arterial
road as a priority.
Another route is displayed.
3
Touch [OK].
“Route confirmation screen” appears.
49
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
06
Setting a route to your destination
Avoid Toll Road
p The system may calculate a route that in-
This setting controls whether toll roads (in-
cluding toll areas) should be taken into ac-
count.
cludes streets or bridges that are subject to
traffic restrictions during a certain time
even if [On] is selected.
[Off]*:
Calculate a route that may include toll roads
(including toll areas).
CAUTION
If the time difference is not set correctly, the navi-
gation system cannot consider traffic regulations
correctly. Set the time difference correctly (=
[On]:
Calculate a route that avoids toll roads (includ-
ing toll areas).
p The system may calculate a route that in-
cludes toll road even if [On] is selected.
Learning Route
The system learns the travel history of your ve-
hicle for each road.
This setting controls whether or not the travel
history should be taken into account.
[On]*:
Avoid Ferry
This setting controls whether ferry crossings
should be taken into account.
[Off]*:
Calculate a route that may include ferries.
[On]:
Calculate a route that avoids ferries.
p The system may calculate a route that in-
cludes ferry way even if [On] is selected.
Calculate the route with the travel history
taken into account.
[Off]:
Calculate the route without the travel history
taken into account.
[Clear]:
Clear the current travel history.
Avoid Freeway
This setting controls whether freeways may be
included in the route calculation.
[Off]*:
Calculate a route that may include freeways.
[On]:
Checking the current itinerary
You can check the route details.
Calculate a route that avoids freeways.
p The system may calculate a route that in-
cludes freeway even if [On] is selected.
%
Touch [Profile] on the “Route confirma-
tion screen”.
The “Route Profile” screen appears.
Time restrictions
This setting controls whether streets or
bridges have traffic restrictions during a cer-
tain time should be taken into account.
p If you want to set your route to avoid
opened bridges, select [On].
[On]*:
Calculate a route while avoiding streets or
bridges with traffic restrictions during a cer-
tain time.
Adding a waypoint
Up to 5 waypoints can be set, and waypoints
and final destination can be sorted automati-
cally or manually.
[Off]:
Calculate a route while ignoring traffic restric-
tions.
50
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Setting a route to your destination
06
p When you set waypoints in the route to
your destination, the route up to the next
waypoint will appear in light green. The rest
of the route will appear in light blue.
4
Touch [OK] on the “Waypoints List”
screen.
The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-
mation screen” appears.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
1
Touch [Waypoints] on the “Route con-
firmation screen”.
The “Waypoints List” screen appears.
2
Touch [Add].
The “Select Search method” screen appears.
3
Search for a location.
After searching for a point, display it on a
map, then touch [OK] to add to the “Way-
points List” screen.
= For details, refer to Chapter 8.
51
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
07
Checking and modifying the current route
You can check the route details. You can also
recalculate the route in different conditions.
Editing waypoints
You can edit waypoints (locations you want to
visit on the way to your destination) and recal-
culate the route so that is passes through
these locations.
To edit the waypoints, display the “Waypoints
List” screen.
1
Display the “Top Menu” screen.
2
Touch [Destination].
The “Destination Menu” screen appears.
3
Touch [Route Overview].
The “Route Overview” screen appears.
1
Display the “Route Overview” screen.
2
Touch [Waypoints].
The “Waypoints List” screen appears.
p [Route Overview] is active only when the
route is set.
Adding a waypoint
Up to 5 waypoints can be set, and waypoints
and final destination can be sorted automati-
cally or manually.
Checking the current itinerary
You can check the route details.
1
Display the “Route Overview” screen.
2
Touch [Profile].
1
Display the “Waypoints List” screen.
The “Route Profile” screen appears.
2
Touch [Add].
The “Select Search method” screen appears.
p When a long distance route is calculated,
your navigation system may not be able to
list all roads. (In this case, the remaining
roads will be shown in the list as you drive
on.)
3
Search for a location.
After searching for a point, display it on a
map, then touch [OK] to add to the “Way-
points List” screen.
52
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Checking and modifying the current route
07
2
Touch [Sort].
The “Sort Waypoints” screen appears.
= For details, refer to Chapter 8.
4
Touch [OK] on the “Waypoints List”
screen.
3
Touch the waypoint or destination.
Put them in the desired order.
Touch [Automatic].
The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-
mation screen” appears.
#
You can sort the destination and waypoints auto-
matically. The system will show the nearest way-
point (distance in a straight line) from the current
location as waypoint 1, and sort the other points
(including your destination) in order of distance
from the waypoint 1.
5
Touch [OK].
The map of the current position appears.
Deleting a waypoint
You can delete waypoints from the route and
then recalculate the route. (You can delete
waypoints successively.)
#
Touch [Clear].
The sorting waypoints is canceled.
4
Touch [OK].
1
Display the “Waypoints List” screen.
The “Waypoints List” screen appears.
2
Touch [Delete] next to the waypoint
5
Touch [OK] on the “Waypoints List”
that you want to delete.
The touched waypoint will be deleted from the
list.
screen.
The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-
mation screen” appears.
3
Touch [OK] on the “Waypoints List”
6
Touch [OK].
screen.
The map of the current position appears.
The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-
mation screen” appears.
Modifying the route
calculation conditions
4
Touch [OK].
The map of the current position appears.
The settings related to route calculation can
Sorting waypoints
be customized.
You can sort waypoints and recalculate the
route.
p You cannot sort waypoints that you have al-
ready passed.
1
Display the “Route confirmation
screen”.
2
Touch [Options].
The “Route Options” screen appears.
1
Display the “Waypoints List” screen.
53
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
07
Checking and modifying the current route
#
Touch [No].
Returns to the previous display without deleting
the route.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
Canceling the route guidance
If you no longer need to travel to your destina-
tion, follow the steps below to cancel the route
guidance.
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
2
Touch [Cancel Route].
A message confirming the cancellation of the
current route appears.
3
Touch [Yes].
The current route is deleted, and a map of
your surroundings reappears.
#
Touch [Skip].
The next waypoint along the route can be
skipped.
A new route to your destination through all re-
maining waypoints, except for the skipped way-
point, is calculated.
When the route calculation is completed, “Route
confirmation screen” appears.
p [Skip] is available only when a waypoint is
set.
54
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Searching for and selecting a location
08
!
Finding the location by specifying the
house number
CAUTION
For safety reasons, these route-setting functions
are not available while your vehicle is in motion.
To enable these functions, you must stop in a
safe place and put on the parking brake before
setting your route.
To search for a location, display the “Address
Search” screen.
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
2
Touch [Address].
The “Address Search” screen appears.
p Some information regarding traffic regula-
tions depends on the time when the route
calculation is performed. Thus, the infor-
mation may not correspond with a certain
traffic regulation when your vehicle actually
passes through the location in question.
Also, the information on the traffic regula-
tions provided will be for a passenger vehi-
cle, and not for a truck or other delivery
vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic
regulations when driving.
3
Touch the key next to “Country” to se-
To search for a location, display the “Destina-
tion Menu” screen.
lect the country.
If the destination is in another country, this
changes the country setting.
p Once the country has been selected, you
only have to change countries when your
destination is outside of the country you se-
lected.
1
Press the HOME button to display the
“Top Menu”.
2
Touch [Destination].
The “Destination Menu” screen appears.
4
Touch the key next to “State” and
touch the desired state, province, or terri-
tory on the list.
If the location that you want to search for is in
another state, province, or territory, this
changes the area setting.
p Once the state, province, or territory has
been selected, you only have to change
states, provinces, or territories when your
destination is outside of the state, province,
or territory you selected.
Searching for a location by
address
The most frequently used function is [Ad-
dress], in which the address is specified and
the destination is searched.
Searching for a city name first
p Depending on the search results, some
steps may be skipped.
You can select the method of searching for a
location by address.
1
2
Display the “Address Search” screen.
!
Searching for a city name first
Touch [City].
The “Enter City Name” screen appears.
55
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Searching for and selecting a location
8
Touch the desired house number range.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
Finding the location by
specifying the house number
p Depending on the search results, some
steps may be skipped.
3
Enter the city name and then touch
1
2
Display the “Address Search” screen.
[OK].
The “Select City” screen appears.
Touch [House #].
The “Enter House Number” screen appears.
4
Touch the desired city name.
The “Street Name” screen appears.
3
Enter the house number and then
#
Touch
.
touch [OK].
The “Enter Street Name” screen appears.
The representative location of the city appears on
the map screen.
5
Enter the street name and then touch
[OK].
The “Street Selection” screen appears.
6
Touch the desired street.
The “Enter House Number” screen appears.
4
Enter the street name and then touch
[OK].
The “Street Selection” screen appears.
5
Touch the desired street.
The “Enter City Name” screen appears.
7
Enter the house number and then
touch [OK].
The “House Number Selection” screen ap-
pears.
56
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Searching for and selecting a location
08
Entering three keywords
The names including the following two words
below are displayed as a result:
!
The words that match with both first and
second keywords you entered.
!
The word beginning with the third keyword.
e.g. Searching “East West Street”.
Entered key-
Search results
words
6
Enter the city name and then touch
EAST W
“East West Street” is searchable.
[OK].
The “Select City” screen appears.
WEST S
“East West Street” is searchable.
EAST WEST S
“East West Street” is searchable.
7
Touch the desired city name.
The “House Number Selection” screen ap-
pears.
WEST STREET
E
“East West Street” is searchable.
#
Touch
.
“East West Street” is not search-
able.
W E S
The representative location of the city appears on
the map screen.
E WEST
STREET
“East West Street” is not search-
able.
8
Touch the desired house number range.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
Setting up a route to your
home
Searching for a name by
entering multiple keywords
If your home location is stored, the route
home can be calculated by touching a single
key.
You can search for a name (such as a city
name or a street name) by entering multiple
keywords.
p Up to three keywords can be entered.
p Enter a space between keywords as you
want to enter several ones.
The result of search depends on the number
of the entered keywords.
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
2
Touch [Return Home].
“Location confirmation screen” appears.
If the home location has not been stored yet,
the confirmation message appears.
Entering a keyword
#
Touch [Register].
All names containing the word beginning with
entered keyword are displayed as a search re-
sult.
The “Set Home” screen appears.
Entering two keywords
The names including the following two words
below are displayed as a result:
!
The word that matches with the first key-
word you entered.
!
The word beginning with the second key-
word.
57
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Searching for and selecting a location
State code key
Searching for Points of
Interest (POI)
Information about various facilities (Points Of
Interest - POI), such as gas stations, parking
lots or restaurants, is available. You can
search for a POI by selecting the category (or
entering the POI Name).
To search for POIs, display the “POI Search”
screen.
3
Touch the state code key and touch the
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
desired state, province, or territory on the
list.
2
Touch [POI].
The “POI Search” screen appears.
If the location that you want to search for is in
another state, province, or territory, this
changes the area setting.
#
Touch [Country] to display the country list.
If the destination is in another country, this
changes the country setting.
4
Enter the POI name and then touch
[OK].
The “POI List” screen appears.
5
Touch the POI you want.
Searching for POIs by
specifying a category first
You can search for POIs with one touch by
touching the preset category.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
#
Each time you touch [Sort] changes the sort
order.
Touch [Sort].
1
2
Display the “POI Search” screen.
p Current order is displayed on the upper
right of the screen.
Touch the desired category.
!
:
The “POI List” screen appears.
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
:
3
Touch the POI you want.
!
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.
Searching for a nearby POI
You can search for POIs in your surroundings.
Searching for a POI directly
from the name of the facilities
1
Display the “POI Search” screen.
1
Display the “POI Search” screen.
2
Touch [Near Me].
2
Touch [Spell Name].
POI’s are divided into several categories.
The “POI Name” screen appears.
58
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Searching for and selecting a location
08
3
Touch the category you want.
State code key
The “POI List” screen appears.
p If there are more detailed categories within
the selected category, repeat this step as
many times as necessary.
4
Touch the POI you want.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
Searching for POIs around the
destination
p This function is available when the route is
3
Touch the state code key and touch the
desired state, province, or territory on the
list.
If the location that you want to search for is in
another state, province, or territory, this
changes the area setting.
set.
1
2
Display the “POI Search” screen.
#
Touch [Country] to display the country list.
Touch [Near Destination].
If the destination is in another country, this
changes the country setting.
POI’s are divided into several categories.
3
Touch the category you want.
4
Enter the city name and then touch
The “POI List” screen appears.
[OK].
p If there are more detailed categories within
the selected category, repeat this step as
many times as necessary.
The “Select City” screen appears.
5
Touch the desired city name.
The “POI List” screen appears.
Touch
4
Touch the POI you want.
#
.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
The representative location of the city appears on
the map screen.
6
Touch the category you want.
Searching for POIs around the city
POI’s are divided into several categories.
You can search for POIs around a specified
city.
7
Touch the POI you want.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
1
Display the “POI Search” screen.
2
Touch [Around City].
The “Enter City Name” screen appears.
Selecting destination from
“Favorites”
Storing locations you visit frequently saves
time and effort.
Selecting an item from the list provides an
easy way to specify the position.
p This function is not available when there is
no registered location in “Favorites”.
59
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
08
Searching for and selecting a location
5
Touch the POI you want.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
1
The “Destination Menu” screen ap-
pears.
Selecting a location you
searched for recently
2
Touch [Favorites].
The “Favorites” screen appears.
The places that you have searched for in the
past are automatically stored in “History”.
p If no location is stored in Destination His-
tory, you cannot select [History]. (If you
perform a route calculation, you can select
[History].)
p “History” can store up to 100 locations. If
the entries reach the maximum, the new
entry overwrites the oldest one.
3
Touch the entry you want.
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
2
Touch [History].
The “Destination History List” screen ap-
pears.
Searching for POIs by using
the data on the SD memory
card
Creating a customized POI is possible by
using the utility program “AVIC FEEDS” which
is available separately, on your PC. (“AVIC
FEEDS” will be available on our website.) Stor-
ing the customized POI properly and inserting
the SD memory card enables the system to
use the data for searches.
3
Touch the entry you want.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
Searching for a location by
coordinates
2
3
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
Entering a latitude and longitude pinpoints
the location.
Touch [AVIC FEEDS].
POI’s are divided into several categories.
1
2
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
4
Touch the category you want.
Touch [Coordinates].
The “Select POI” screen appears.
The “Coordinate Input” screen appears.
60
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Searching for and selecting a location
08
3
Touch [East] or [West], and then enter
the longitude.
To enter W 50°1’2.5” for example, touch
[West], [0], [5], [0], [0], [1], [0], [2], and [5].
4
Touch [North] or [South], and then
enter the latitude.
To enter N 5°1’2.5” for example, touch [North],
[0], [5], [0], [1], [0], [2], and [5].
5
Touch [OK].
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
61
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
09
Registering and editing locations
2
Touch
to display the Quick Access
Registering a location into
“Favorites”
Registering a location by
“Favorites”
menu.
3
Touch
.
The location is registered, and then the “Edit
Favorite” screen appears.
Favorites can store up to 400 registered loca-
tions. These can include your home location,
favorite places, and destinations you have al-
ready registered.
4
Touch [OK].
The registration is completed.
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
2
Touch [Favorites].
Editing registered locations
The “Favorites” screen appears.
Editing the entry in “Favorites”
3
Touch [Add].
The “Select Search method” screen appears.
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
4
Search for a location.
2
Touch [Favorites].
= For details, refer to Chapter 8.
The “Favorites” screen appears.
5
When the map of the location you
3
Touch next to the location that you
want to register is displayed, touch [OK].
The location is registered, and then the “Edit
Favorite” screen appears.
want to edit.
The “Edit Favorite” screen appears.
6
Touch [OK].
The registration is completed.
Registering a location by scroll
mode
4
Touch [Name].
1
Touch and drag the screen to scroll the
You can enter the desired name.
p Up to 17 characters can be input for the
name.
map to the position that you want to regis-
ter.
#
Touch [Phone #].
You can edit the registered phone number. To dial
the number, touch [Call].
#
Touch [Icon].
The symbol displayed on the map and “Favor-
ites”.
#
Touch [Modify Location].
You can change the registered location by scrol-
ling the map.
62
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Registering and editing locations
09
3
Touch [Sort].
Editing your home
When you have already registered your home,
you can edit the information of your home.
Each time you touch [Sort] changes the sort
order.
p Current order is displayed on the upper
right of the screen.
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
!
:
2
Touch [Favorites].
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
The “Favorites” screen appears.
p Home location is displayed on the top of
the list.
tance from the vehicle position.
!
!
:
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.
:
Sorts the items in the list in order of the re-
cently used items.
Deleting the entry in “Favorites”
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
2
Touch [Favorites].
The “Favorites” screen appears.
3
Touch
next to the home location.
The “Edit Favorite” screen appears.
3
Touch [Delete].
The “Delete from Favorites” screen appears.
#
Touch [Phone #].
You can edit the registered phone number. To dial
the number, touch [Call].
4
Select the location you want to delete.
A check mark appears by the selected loca-
tion.
#
Touch [Modify Location].
You can change the registered location by scrol-
ling the map.
4
Touch [OK].
The registration is completed.
Sorting the entry in “Favorites”
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
2
Touch [Favorites].
#
Touch [All].
Selects all entries.
Touch [None].
The “Favorites” screen appears.
#
63
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
09
Registering and editing locations
Displayed when all locations are selected. Can-
cels all selected locations.
After exporting the data is finished, the follow-
ing message appears.
5
Touch [Delete].
A message will appear asking you to confirm
the deletion.
5
Touch [OK].
The “Favorites” screen appears.
Importing “Favorites” edited on
“AVIC FEEDS”
You can import the locations that you have edi-
ted on the utility program “AVIC FEEDS” which
is available separately to “Favorites”.
p When a location that is already registered
in “Favorites” is imported, the location is
overwritten.
6
Touch [Yes].
The data you selected is deleted.
Touch [No].
#
Cancels the deletion.
Exporting and importing
the entry in “Favorites”
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD
Exporting the entry in “Favorites”
card slot.
Exporting the “Favorites” data to an SD mem-
ory card for editing is possible by using the uti-
lity program “AVIC FEEDS” which is available
separately, on your PC.
p If there is a previous data in the SD mem-
ory card, the data is overwritten with new
data when current data is exported.
2
3
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
Touch [Favorites].
The “Favorites” screen appears.
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
4
Touch
.
The following message appears.
2
3
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
Touch [Favorites].
The “Favorites” screen appears.
4
Touch
.
Exporting the data starts.
64
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Registering and editing locations
09
5
Touch [Yes].
5
Touch [Delete].
Data import starts.
After importing the data is finished, the “Fa-
vorites” screen appears.
A message will appear asking you to confirm
the deletion.
6
Touch [Yes].
The data you selected is deleted.
Touch [No].
Cancels the deletion.
#
Deleting an entry in “History”
Items in History can be deleted. All entries in
History can be deleted at once.
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
2
Touch [History].
The “Destination History List” screen ap-
pears.
3
Touch [Delete].
The “Delete from History” screen appears.
4
Select the location you want to delete.
A check mark appears by the selected loca-
tion.
#
Touch [All].
Selects all entries.
Touch [None].
#
Displayed when all locations are selected. Can-
cels all selected locations.
65
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
10
Browsing information on MSN Direct
If you have an active subscription to
General flow chart:
MSN Direct service, you can check and
browse various information on your navigation
system, such as gas prices, movie times,
weather conditions and traffic information.
The information will be updated periodically.
1 Check your product key.
You have to know your product key for the
subscription.
j
IMPORTANT:
2 Make an online subscription to MSN Direct
To receive MSNâ Direct on an MSN Direct-
ready device, you must be within an MSN Di-
rect coverage area; see http://www.msndirect.
com/pioneer for current coverage maps.
Coverage areas are affected by reception lim-
itations of the FM network as well as other fac-
tors, which may affect the ability to receive FM
broadcasts. Coverage areas are subject to
change. Not all content is available in all cover-
age areas.
service using your PC.
(Refer to Subscribing to the MSN Direct ser-
j
3 Activate the MSN Direct service on this pro-
duct.
(Refer to Activating the MSN Direct function
j
4 Activation is complete.
© 2008 Microsoft Corporation. All rights re-
served. Microsoft, MSN, and the MSN logo are
trademarks of the Microsoft group of compa-
nies.
Checking your product key
The product key that you can find here is used
in the online subscription.
Notice about MSN Direct
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
Pioneer is not responsible for the accuracy of
the MSN Direct content. The MSN Direct con-
tent may not be current or available at times,
and is subject to change without notice.
and then touch [MSN Direct].
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.
2
Touch [Status].
3
Write your product key down in the fol-
lowing box;
Activating the service
You have to activate MSN Direct first.
p A web-connected computer is required for
the online subscription.
p If you have difficulty for the online subscrip-
tion, please call toll-free 1-866-658-7032.
66
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Browsing information on MSN Direct
Subscribing to the MSN Direct
10
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
service
dates gas price information, the information
provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-
tual gas prices. Please refer to Notice about
It may take up to 24 hours for all the data to be-
come available under the following conditions:
Within two days of completing the subscription,
1
Access the following URL and read the
description.
http://www.msndirect.com/pioneer
!
!
When you use MSN Direct for the first time.
When you have not performed this function
previously around the current area.
After the navigation system has been
turned off for a few days.
2
Be sure to check the coverage area and
other availabilities of MSN Direct on the
web page.
!
3
Go to the page for activation and enter
your product key.
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.
4
Follow the directions on the web page
to complete the subscription.
Activating the MSN Direct function
After the online subscription, complete the ac-
tivation so that the navigation system can re-
ceive the information.
This operation must be performed under the
following conditions
— You are currently in the coverage area of
MSN Direct.
2
Touch [Gas Prices].
The “Gas Prices” screen appears.
1
Boot-up your navigation system.
2
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.
3
Touch [Status].
4
Wait until the activation status changes
to “Active”.
It may take approximately 20 or 30 minutes to
complete the activation.
After activation is complete, the information
will be available on each menu.
3
Touch the desired tab to change the
sort order.
Available options;
!
[Dist.] (default):
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
[Name]:
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.
[Price]:
!
!
Browsing gas prices
Recent gas prices of nearby gas stations are
displayed in a list.
67
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
10
Browsing information on MSN Direct
Sorts the items in the list by price.
Touch [Refresh].
The information is updated.
p [Refresh] appears when new gas prices in-
formation is received.
Searching for a theater by
selecting a movie title
#
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
2
Touch [Movie Times].
4
Touch on the item that you want to
The “All Movie Theaters” screen appears.
view in detail.
#
Touch
.
3
Touch [All Movie Titles].
The movie titles now showing are displayed.
Touch [Refresh].
“Location confirmation screen” appears.
#
The information is updated.
p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-
tion is received.
5
Touch [OK].
“Location confirmation screen” appears.
4
Touch the desired movie title.
The theaters that are currently showing the se-
lected movie are displayed.
Browsing movie times
Nearby theaters can be displayed on a list.
Switching the screen allows you to see the
movie title now showing.
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates movie information, the information pro-
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual
#
Touch [Refresh].
The information is updated.
p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-
tion is received.
It may take up to 6 hours for all the data to be-
come available under the following conditions:
5
Touch the desired tab to change the
!
!
When you use MSN Direct for the first time.
When you have not performed this function
previously around the current area.
After the navigation system has been
turned off for a few days.
sort order.
Available options;
!
[Dist.] (default):
!
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
68
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Browsing information on MSN Direct
10
!
[Name]:
p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.
tion is received.
6
Touch on the item that you want to
5
Touch on the item that you want to
view in detail.
Touch
“Location confirmation screen” appears.
view in detail.
#
.
6
Touch [OK].
“Location confirmation screen” appears.
7
Touch [OK].
#
Touch [Call].
“Location confirmation screen” appears.
Enables you to call the position if a telephone
number is available. (Pairing with cellular phone
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re-
quired.)
#
Touch [Call].
Enables you to call the position if a telephone
number is available. (Pairing with cellular phone
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re-
quired.)
Browsing weather
information
Local weather information can be displayed
on a list. Switching the screen allows you to
see worldwide weather conditions.
Searching for a movie title by
selecting a theater
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates weather information, the information
provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-
tual weather conditions. Please refer to Notice
2
Touch [Movie Times].
The “All Movie Theaters” screen appears.
3
Touch the desired tab to change the
sort order.
Available options;
Checking the local weather
information
!
[Dist.] (default):
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
[Name]:
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
!
and then touch [MSN Direct].
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.
2
Touch [Weather].
4
Touch the desired theater.
The local weather information is displayed.
The movie titles currently shown on the se-
lected theater are displayed.
#
Touch
.
“Location confirmation screen” appears.
#
Touch [Refresh].
The information is updated.
69
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
10
Browsing information on MSN Direct
Using traffic information
You can view current traffic conditions and in-
formation. When the navigation system re-
ceives updated traffic information, it will
overlay the traffic information on your map
and also display detailed text information
when available.
In the default setting, the navigation system
takes into account traffic information and tries
to avoid traffic congestions and suggest better
routes. Also, when you are traveling along a
route and the system finds another better
route for avoiding the traffic congestion, the
current route will be recalculated automati-
cally.
The city name, weather, temperature and wind
direction are displayed in list format.
3
Touch the desired area.
Detailed information is displayed.
The term “traffic congestion” in this section in-
dicates the following types of traffic condi-
tions:
— Stop-and-go traffic
— Stopped traffic
— Closed/blocked roads
Touching [Forecast] displays the weather fore-
casts for these three days.
Viewing the traffic event
Traffic Information is displayed on a screen in
the form of a list. This allows you to check how
many traffic incidents have occurred, their lo-
cation and their distance from your current po-
sition.
Checking worldwide weather
conditions
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates traffic information, the information pro-
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual
traffic conditions. Please refer to Notice about
2
Touch [Weather].
The local weather information is displayed.
3
Touch [Worldwide].
Worldwide weather conditions are displayed.
The area names and weather conditions are
displayed on the list. The list is sorted alphabe-
tically by the area name.
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
4
Touch the desired area.
2
Touch [Traffic Events].
Detailed information is displayed.
The “Traffic Event List” screen appears.
70
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Browsing information on MSN Direct
10
been removed, the list is updated to reflect the
new situation.
Touch
Touching
#
.
allows you to check the location on
a map. (Traffic information without positional in-
formation cannot be checked on a map.)
4
Touch
.
Return to the previous screen.
3
Select an incident you want to view in
detail.
Checking traffic information on
the route
All traffic information on the current route is
displayed on screen in a list.
The details of the selected incident are dis-
played.
p Touching an incident you want to see allows
you to view the detailed information of the
incident. If the information cannot be dis-
played on one screen, touch or to view
the remaining information.
%
Touch [Traffic On Route].
The “Traffic On Route” screen appears.
The method for checking the content dis-
#
Touch [Sort].
You can sort the traffic information.
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
!
:
How to read traffic information
on the map
The traffic event information displayed on the
map is as follows.
p A line is displayed only when the map scale
is 2.5 miles (5 km) or lower.
p Icon appears only when the scale on the
map is 10 miles (20 km) or lower. If the
scale is changed, the icons are resized ac-
cording to the selected scale.
You can sort the traffic information by dis-
tance from your current position.
For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-
fic Events], the list will be sorted according
to the linear distance from the vehicle posi-
tion to the traffic information.
For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-
fic On Route], the list will be sorted accord-
ing to the distance from the vehicle position
to the traffic information.
!
!
:
You can sort the traffic information in alpha-
betical order.
:
You can sort the traffic information accord-
ing to the incident.
The list will be sorted in the order of closed/
blocked roads, traffic congestion, acci-
dents, road works and others.
Traffic event icon
Current order is displayed on the upper right of
the screen.
Touch [Refresh].
When new traffic information is received, current
information is changed or old information has
!
!
with yellow line:
Stop-and-go traffic
with red line:
#
Stopped traffic
71
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
10
Browsing information on MSN Direct
!
!
with black line:
Closed/blocked roads
etc.:
1
Touch [New].
The recommended route is displayed on the
screen.
#
Accidents, constructions, etc.
Touch [Current].
The current route is displayed on the screen.
Setting an alternative route to
avoid traffic congestion
The navigation system checks whether or not
there is the traffic information on your route at
regular time intervals. If the navigation system
detects any traffic jams on your current route,
the system tries to find a better route in the
background.
p The following types of traffic incidents on
the route will be checked: slow, queuing
and stationary traffic, and closed/blocked
roads.
2
Touch [OK].
The displayed route is set.
p When no selection is made, the screen re-
turns to previous screen.
Checking traffic information manually
Touching the notification icon on the map
screen allows you to check traffic information
on your route while icon is displayed. The noti-
fication icon is only displayed on the naviga-
tion map screen if there is any traffic
information on your route.
p The notification icon will not be available
when your vehicle deviate from the route.
Checking for traffic congestion
automatically
1
Set [Show Traffic Incident] to [View].
If there is information about traffic congestion
on your current route and if an alternative
route can be found, the navigation system will
recommend a new alternative route automati-
cally. In such a case, the following screen will
appear.
2
Display the map screen.
The icon appears when the system acquires
traffic information on the current route.
3
Touch the icon while the icon is dis-
played.
Traffic information on the current route is dis-
played on the map screen.
1
2
1 Distance from the current position of your ve-
hicle to the point of entry into the new route.
2 Difference in distance and travel time between
the existing route and new route.
p There is no action if the system cannot find
any traffic congestion information on your
route or the system cannot find an alterna-
tive.
4
Touch [Diversion] to search for an alter-
native route.
After touching [Diversion], the route is recal-
culated taking all traffic congestion on your
current route into account.
72
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Browsing information on MSN Direct
10
p [Diversion] will be enable only when the
system can find “traffic congestion”.
incident. If the information cannot be dis-
played on one screen, touch or to view
the remaining information.
Touch [Sort].
p “Notification icon” shows the nearest traffic
information on the route. However, if you
touch [Diversion], the route is recalculated
by taking into account not only this infor-
mation, but also all traffic congestion infor-
mation on the route.
#
You can sort the traffic information.
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
!
:
You can sort the traffic information by dis-
tance from your current position.
For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-
fic Events], the list will be sorted according
to the linear distance from the vehicle posi-
tion to the traffic information.
For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-
fic On Route], the list will be sorted accord-
ing to the distance from the vehicle position
to the traffic information.
#
Touch [List].
The “Traffic On Route” screen appears.
Touch
#
.
The message disappears, and the map display re-
appears.
!
!
:
Viewing the traffic flow
You can sort the traffic information in alpha-
betical order.
Traffic Information is displayed on a screen in
the form of a list. This allows you to check how
many traffic incidents have occurred, their lo-
cation and their distance from your current po-
sition.
:
You can sort the traffic information accord-
ing to the incident.
The list will be sorted in the order of closed/
blocked roads, traffic congestion, acci-
dents, road works and others.
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates traffic information, the information pro-
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual
traffic conditions. Please refer to Notice about
Current order is displayed on the upper right of
the screen.
#
Touch [Refresh].
When new traffic information is received, current
information is changed or old information has
been removed, the list is updated to reflect the
new situation.
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
#
Touch
.
The traffic event information displayed on the
map is as follows.
2
Touch [Traffic Flow].
A list with traffic event information that has
been received is shown.
Places (street names) where incidents have
occurred are displayed on the list.
3
Select an incident you want to view in
detail.
The details of the selected incident are dis-
played.
p Touching an incident you want to see allows
Traffic flow icon and line
you to view the detailed information of the
73
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
10
Browsing information on MSN Direct
!
!
Red: average speed in this area is slower
than 15 mph (24 km/h)
Yellow: average speed in this area is be-
tween 15 mph to 45 mph (24 km/h to 72 km/
h)
!
Green: average speed in this area is faster
than 45 mph (72 km/h) (An icon without a
line will be displayed)
p Touching [All (None)] selects or deselects
all traffic information.
Touch [All].
Selects all traffic information.
Touch [None].
Displayed when all traffic information are se-
Selecting traffic information to
display
There are different types of traffic information
that can be received via the MSN Direct ser-
vice, and you can select which types will be in-
corporated and displayed on your navigation
system.
#
#
lected. Cancels all selected traffic information.
5
Touch [OK].
The selected traffic information icon is added
to the screen.
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
6
Touch [OK].
2
Touch [Traffic Settings].
The “Traffic Settings” screen appears.
Browsing local events
3
Touch [Displayed Traffic Information].
The nearby events to be held in the next few
days are displayed on a list, and you can see
the detail event information.
The “Traffic Type Settings” screen appears.
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates local event information, the information
provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-
tual local event conditions. Please refer to No-
4
Touch the traffic information item to
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
display.
and then touch [MSN Direct].
A check mark appears by the selected traffic
information.
2
Touch [Local Events].
The “Local Event Date” screen appears.
74
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Browsing information on MSN Direct
10
The information is updated.
p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-
tion is received.
8
Touch [OK].
“Location confirmation screen” appears.
#
Touch [Call].
Enables you to call the position if a telephone
number is available. (Pairing with cellular phone
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re-
quired.)
3
Touch the date on which you want to
check the events.
The “Local Event Groups List” screen ap-
pears.
4
Touch the category of events that you
want to check.
The “Local Event Sub Groups List” screen ap-
pears.
Browsing news headlines
Recent news headlines are displayed in a list.
5
Touch the subcategory of events that
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates news headlines, the information pro-
vided may not necessarily correspond to
current news headlines. Please refer to Notice
you want to check.
The “Local Events” screen appears.
6
Touch the desired tab to change the
sort order.
Available options;
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
!
[Dist.] (default):
and then touch [MSN Direct].
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
[Name]:
2
Touch [News].
!
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.
7
Touch the desired event to display de-
tailed information of the event.
3
Touch the desired news headline.
Further details about the news are displayed.
#
Touch
.
“Location confirmation screen” appears.
#
Touch [Refresh].
75
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
10
Browsing information on MSN Direct
3
Touch [Add].
The “Stock Info” screen appears.
4
Enter the stock symbol that you want
to select, and then touch [OK].
The selected stock symbol is added to the
“Stock Info” screen.
p Arrow in the left of each item indicates the
stock price movement. If there is no stock
price movements than previous close, “—”
is displayed.
#
Touch [Refresh].
The information is updated.
p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-
tion is received.
Viewing the detailed stock quotes
4
Touch or to scroll the list.
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
2
3
Touch [Stocks].
Browsing stock quotes
Recent stock quotes are displayed in a list.
Touch the desired stock quote.
Detailed stock quote information is displayed.
Although the stock quote displayed onscreen
is updated about 40 minutes (approx.), these
prices are not realtime values.
It may take up to 20 minutes for all the data to
become available under the following condi-
tions:
!
!
When you use MSN Direct for the first time.
When you have not performed this function
previously around the current area.
After the navigation system has been
turned off for a few days.
#
Touch [Delete].
!
The message confirming whether to delete the
entry appears.
And then touch [OK] to delete the stock symbol
from the “Stock Info” screen.
Selecting stock symbols
Up to 30 stock symbols can be selected.
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
2
Touch [Stocks].
The “Stock Info” screen appears.
p The seven stock indices is always selected
and displayed on the bottom of the list.
76
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device
11
If your devices feature Bluetoothâ technology,
this navigation system can be connected to
your devices wirelessly. This section describes
how to set up a Bluetooth connection.
!
!
Searching for a specified Bluetooth device
Pairing from your Bluetooth devices
p If you try to register more than 5 devices,
the system will ask you to select one of the
registered devices to delete.
To register your Bluetooth devices, display the
“Bluetooth Settings” screen.
For more information about the connectivity
with the devices featuring Bluetooth wireless
technology, refer to the information on our
website.
1
Press the HOME button to display the
“Top Menu”.
Preparing communication
devices
2
Touch [Settings].
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.
This navigation system has a built-in function
to use devices featuring Bluetooth wireless
technology.
3
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.
You can register and use devices that feature
the following profiles with this navigation sys-
tem.
Searching for nearby Bluetooth
devices
The system searches for available Bluetooth
devices near the navigation system, displays
them in a list, and registers them for connec-
tion.
!
!
HFP (Hands Free Profile)
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Pro-
file)
p When the navigation system is turned off,
the Bluetooth connection is also discon-
nected. When the system restarts, the sys-
tem automatically attempts to reconnect
the previously-connected cellular phone.
Even when the connection is severed for
some reason, the system automatically re-
connects the specified cellular phone (ex-
cept when the connection is severed due to
cellular phone operation).
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your devices.
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless
technology. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your devices.
2
Display the “Bluetooth Settings”
screen.
3
Touch [Registration].
The “Nearby Device List” screen appears.
Registering your Bluetooth
devices
You need to register your devices featuring
Bluetooth wireless technology when you con-
nect it for the first time. A total of 5 devices
can be registered. Three registration methods
are available:
!
Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices
77
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
11
Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device
p If the registered device features both HFP
The system searches for devices featuring
Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the
connection and displays them in the list if the
device has found.
and A2DP, the hands-free connection is
made and then the Bluetooth Audio con-
nection is made.
p Up to 30 devices will be listed in the order
that the devices are found.
Searching for a specified
Bluetooth device
If you cannot connect your Bluetooth device
using [Search devices] and [Register from
mobile phone], try this method if your Blue-
tooth device is found in the list.
4
Wait until your Bluetooth device ap-
pears in the list.
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your devices.
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless
technology. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your devices.
p If you cannot find the Bluetooth device that
you want to connect, check that the device
is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology connection.
2
Display the “Bluetooth Settings”
screen.
3
Touch [Registration].
5
Touch the Bluetooth device name you
The “Nearby Device List” screen appears.
want to register.
The message “Please follow the instructions
on your mobile phone.” appears.
4
Touch [Select specific devices].
The “Select specific devices” screen appears.
6
Enter the PIN code (the default PIN
5
Touch the model name of the Bluetooth
code is “1111”) using the Bluetooth device.
The device is registered in the navigation sys-
tem.
After the device is successfully registered, the
Bluetooth connection is established from the
navigation system.
device to be connected.
The system searches for devices featuring
Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the
connection and displays them in the list if the
device has found.
p If the registered device features HFP, the
hands-free connection is made.
p If the registered device features A2DP, Blue-
tooth Audio connection is made.
78
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device
11
and requesting connection from the Bluetooth
device.
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your devices.
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless
technology. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your devices.
p If you cannot find the desired model name
on the list, touch [Other phones] to search
the devices available nearby.
2
Display the “Bluetooth Settings”
screen.
3
Touch [Registration].
6
Touch the Bluetooth device name you
The “Nearby Device List” screen appears.
want to register.
The message “Please follow the instructions
on your mobile phone.” appears.
4
Touch [Register from mobile phone].
The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth
wireless technology connection.
7
Enter the PIN code (the default PIN
code is “1111”) using the Bluetooth device.
The device is registered in the navigation sys-
tem.
After the device is successfully registered, the
Bluetooth connection is established from the
navigation system.
5
Register the navigation system on your
Bluetooth device.
If your device asks you to enter a password,
enter the PIN code (password) of the naviga-
tion system.
When the device is successfully registered,
the connection settings are made from the de-
vice.
p If the registered device features HFP, the
hands-free connection is made.
p If the registered device features A2DP, Blue-
tooth Audio connection is made.
p If the registered device features both HFP
and A2DP, the hands-free connection is
made and then the Bluetooth Audio con-
nection is made.
p If registration fails repeat the procedure
from the beginning.
Pairing from your Bluetooth
devices
You can register the Bluetooth device by set-
ting the navigation system to standby mode
79
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
11
Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device
connection. However, connect the Bluetooth
device manually in the following cases:
Deleting a registered device
When you have already registered 5 Bluetooth
devices and you want to add another one, you
must first delete one of the registered devices.
p If a registered phone is deleted, all the
phone book entries and call history lists
that correspond to the phone will be also
cleared.
!
Two or more Bluetooth devices are regis-
tered, and you want to manually select the
device to be used.
!
!
You want to reconnect a disconnected
Bluetooth device.
Connection cannot be established automa-
tically for some reason.
If you start connection manually, carry out the
following procedure. You can also connect the
Bluetooth device by having the navigation sys-
tem detect it automatically.
1
Display the “Bluetooth Settings”
screen.
2
Touch [Registration].
The following message appears.
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your devices.
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless
technology. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your devices.
2
Display the “Bluetooth Settings”
screen.
3
Touch [OK].
3
Touch [Connection].
The “Delete from Connection List” screen
The “Connection List” screen appears.
appears.
4
Touch the name of the device that you
4
Touch the Bluetooth device name that
want to connect.
you want to delete.
The “Select Profile” screen appears.
The registration is canceled.
Connecting a registered
Bluetooth device
The navigation system automatically connects
the Bluetooth device selected as the target of
80
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device
11
5
Touch the profile that you want to con-
nect.
You can select the following profiles:
!
!
!
[Handsfree and Audio]:
Connects the device as the hands-free
phone and the Bluetooth audio player.
[Audio]:
Connects the device as Bluetooth audio
player.
[Handsfree]:
Connects the device as the hands-free
phone.
Connection starts.
When a connection is successfully estab-
lished, a connection complete message ap-
pears, the screen returns to the map screen by
touching [OK].
p To cancel the connection to your device,
touch [Cancel].
p The selected device is set for priority con-
necting.
p If connection fails, check whether your de-
vice is waiting for a connection and then re-
try.
81
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
12
Using hands-free phoning
2
3
: Network name of the cellular phone
company
: Strength of the Bluetooth connection
between the navigation system and the de-
vice
CAUTION
For your safety, avoid talking on the phone as
much as possible while driving.
If your cellular phone features Bluetooth®
technology, this navigation system can be con-
nected to your cellular phone wirelessly. Using
this hands-free function, you can operate the
navigation system to make or receive phone
calls. You can also transfer the phone book
data stored in your cellular phone to the navi-
gation system. This section describes how to
set up a Bluetooth connection and how to op-
erate a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth
technology on the navigation system.
4
5
: Reception status of the cellular phone
: Battery status of the cellular phone
Making a phone call
You can make a phone call in many different
ways.
Direct dialing
1
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.
For more information about the connectivity
with the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth
wireless technology, refer to the information
on our website.
2
Touch [Dial Pad].
The direct dial screen appears.
Displaying the Phone Menu
Use the “Phone Menu” if you connect the cel-
lular phone to the navigation system for utiliza-
tion.
= For more details of the operation, refer to
Chapter 11.
3
Touch the number keys to enter the
phone number.
The phone number that was input is dis-
played.
1
Press the HOME button to display the
“Top Menu”.
And then [OK] is activated.
2
Touch [Phone].
#
Touch
.
The “Phone Menu” screen appears.
The input number is deleted a digit at a time from
the end of the number. Continuing to press this
deletes all of the digits.
2
34 5
#
Touch
.
1
Return to the previous screen.
4
5
Touch [OK] to make a call.
p To cancel the call after the system starts
dialing, touch
.
Touch to end the call.
1
: Name of connected cellular phone
82
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using hands-free phoning
Making a call home easily
You can call home without taking the time to
enter the phone number if the phone number
has been registered.
12
Alphabet tabs
Makes the screen jump to the beginning of
the page including the entry whose names
start with any of selected alphabets.
Touching [#ABCDE] also displays the page in-
cluding the entry whose names start with pri-
mary symbols or numbers.
Touching [Others] displays the page including
entries that are not assigned to any of the
other tabs.
1
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.
2
Touch [Call Home].
Dialing home starts.
p If you have not registered your home num-
ber, a message appears. Touch [Register]
to start registration.
4
Touch the desired entry on the list to
make a call.
p If the entry has multiple phone number
data, the selection list appears.
#
Touch [Search].
Calling a number in the
“Contacts List”
The “Contacts Name Search” screen appears.
You can search by the names registered in the
“Contacts List” screen.
After finding the entry you want to call in the
“Contacts List” screen, you can select the
number and make the call.
p Before using this function, you need to set
the phone number from the phone book to
“Contacts”.
#
Touch [Delete].
The “Delete from Contacts” screen appears.
If you select the entry you want to delete and
touch [Delete], a message appears.
If you touch [OK], the entry is deleted.
5
Touch
to end the call.
1
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.
Making a phone call using the
received call history
The received call history saves 30 calls per re-
gistered cellular phone. If the number of calls
exceeds 30, the oldest entry will be deleted.
2
Touch [Contacts].
The “Contacts List” screen appears.
1
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.
2
Touch [Received Calls].
The “Received Calls List” screen appears.
3
Switch the page of the list to display
the desired entry.
If you touch an alphabet tab, you can jump to
the first page of the contacts whose names
start with that letter.
83
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
12
Using hands-free phoning
3
Touch an entry on the list.
Dialing starts.
p To cancel the call after the system starts
dialing, touch
.
#
Touch [Detail].
The “Detailed Information” screen appears.
You can check the details of the party before mak-
ing a phone call.
4
Touch
to end the call.
Making a phone call using
missed call history
The missed call history saves 30 calls per re-
gistered cellular phone. If the number of calls
exceeds 30, the oldest entry will be deleted.
You can check the details of the party before mak-
ing a phone call.
4
Touch
to end the call.
1
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.
Making a phone call using the
dialed number history
2
Touch [Missed Calls].
The dialed number history saves 30 calls per
registered cellular phone. If the entries exceed
30, the oldest one will be deleted.
The “Missed Calls List” screen appears.
1
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.
2
Touch [Dialed Calls].
The “Dialed Calls List” screen appears.
3
Touch an entry on the list.
Dialing starts.
p To cancel the call after the system starts
dialing, touch
.
#
Touch [Detail].
The “Detailed Information” screen appears.
3
Touch an entry on the list.
Dialing starts.
p To cancel the call after the system starts
dialing, touch
.
#
Touch [Detail].
The “Detailed Information” screen appears.
84
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using hands-free phoning
12
4
Touch [Call] to make a call.
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-
ing, touch
.
5
Touch
to end the call.
Dialing a facility’s phone number
You can make a call to facilities with phone
number data.
p You cannot make a call to locations or POIs
that have no phone number data.
You can check the details of the party before mak-
ing a phone call.
4
Touch
to end the call.
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
Dialing GOOG-411
2
Touch [POI].
The “POI Search” screen appears.
CAUTION
Local and/or long distance charges for making a
phone call may apply.
3
Search for the POI.
The “POI List” screen appears.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
You can dial GOOG-411 to dial the free busi-
ness listing service of Googleä with one
touch.
4
Touch
next to the POI that you want
1
Touch [GOOG-411] on the “Phone
Menu”.
to call.
The “Detailed POI Information” screen ap-
pears.
Dialing GOOG-411 starts.
5
Touch [Call] to make a call.
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-
ing, touch
2
You can now use the GOOG-411 phone
.
service.
For details about GOOG-411 service and avail-
ability, contact Googleä.
6
Touch
to end the call.
Dialing from the map
You can make a call by selecting the icon of a
registered location or a POI icon from the map
screen.
Dialing the entry in the “Favorites”
You can make a call to the entry registered in
the “Favorites”.
p You cannot make a call to locations or POIs
that have no phone number data.
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.
2
Touch [Favorites].
1
Scroll the map, and place the cursor on
The “Favorites” screen appears.
an icon on the map.
3
Touch next to the location that you
2
Touch
.
want to make a call.
The “Edit Favorite” screen appears.
The “Detailed POI Information” screen ap-
pears.
85
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
12
Using hands-free phoning
3
Touch [Call] to make a call.
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-
ing, touch
.
4
Touch
to end the call.
Receiving a phone call
You can perform hands-free answering by
using the navigation system.
#
Touch [Vol –] or [Vol +].
You can adjust volume when you are talking.
#
#
and
Touch
If you touch [Close Menu], the menu is closed
appears.
to reject an incoming call.
Answering an incoming call
The system informs you that it is receiving a
call by displaying a message and producing a
ring sound once.
If [Auto Answer Preference] is set to [Off],
answer the call manually. Answering is avail-
able if any screen is displayed, such as the
map screen or the setting screen.
p You can set this navigation system to auto-
matically answer incoming calls.
To display the menu again, touch
.
3
Touch
to end the call.
1
When a call comes in, the answering
The call ends.
operation menu appears on the screen.
p If the voice on the other end of the call is
too quiet to hear, you can adjust the volume
of the received voice.
= For more details about “Volume”, refer
p You may hear a noise when you hang up
the phone.
p The registered name appears if the phone
number of the received call is already regis-
tered in “Contacts”.
p Depending on the caller ID service, the
phone number of the received call may not
be displayed. “Unknown” appears instead.
Rejecting an incoming call
You can reject an incoming call.
%
When a call comes in, touch
.
The call is rejected.
p The rejected call is recorded in the missed
call history list.
2
To answer an incoming call, touch
.
The operation menu during a call appears.
86
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using hands-free phoning
Transferring the phone book
You can transfer the numbers in a registered
user phone’s address book into the Contacts.
p Depending on the cellular phone, “Phone
Book” may be called a name such as “Con-
tacts”, “Business card” or something else.
p With some cellular phones, it may not be
possible to transfer the entire phone book
at once. In this case, transfer addresses
one at a time from your phone book using
your cellular phone.
12
3
Check that the following screen is dis-
played, and operate your cellular phone to
transfer the phone book entries.
p The maximum 1 000 entries can be trans-
ferred per cellular phone. If the entries ex-
ceed 1 000, the extra entries will not be
transferred. If more than one number is re-
gistered for one person, such as work place
and home, each number is counted sepa-
rately.
After transferring the data is finished, a mes-
sage asking whether you want to transfer
more data appears.
p Each entry can hold up to 5 phone num-
bers.
p Depending on the cellular phone that is
connected to this navigation system via
Bluetooth technology, this navigation sys-
tem may not be able to display the phone
book correctly. (Some characters may be
garbled.)
p If the phone book in the cellular phone con-
tains image data, the phone book may not
be correctly transferred.
4
Touch [No].
The transferred data is imported to the naviga-
tion system.
When the data is successfully imported, an
import complete message is displayed and the
“Contacts List” screen appears.
p The transferred data can not be edited on
the navigation system.
p It may take time depending on how many
entries will be transferred.
1
Connect the cellular phone that has the
#
Touch [Yes].
phone book to transfer.
Repeat the steps to transfer more data.
Setting the “Bluetooth
2
Touch [Contacts Transfer] on the
Settings”
“Phone Menu” screen.
To set the “Bluetooth Settings”, display the
“Bluetooth Settings” screen.
1
Press the HOME button to display the
“Top Menu”.
2
Touch [Settings].
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.
87
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
12
Using hands-free phoning
3
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
Stopping Bluetooth wave
transmission
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.
You can stop transmission of electric waves by
turning off the Bluetooth function. If you do
not use the Bluetooth wireless technology, we
recommend selecting [Off].
Editing the device name
You can change the device name to be dis-
played on your cellular phone. (Default is
[PIONEER NAVI].)
1
Display the “Bluetooth Settings”
screen.
1
Display the “Bluetooth Settings”
screen.
2
Touch [Bluetooth On/Off].
Touching [Bluetooth On/Off] switching be-
tween [On] and [Off].
2
Touch [Device Name].
The keyboard to enter the name appears.
3
Touch
to delete the current name,
Echo canceling and noise reduction
and enter the new name by using the key-
board.
When you are operating hands-free phoning
in the vehicle, you may hear an undesirable
echo. This function reduces the echo and
noise while you are using hands-free phoning,
and maintains a certain sound quality.
1
Display the “Bluetooth Settings”
screen.
2
Touch [Echo Cancel].
Touching [Echo Cancel] switches between
[On] and [Off].
4
Touch [OK].
The name is changed.
p Up to 16 characters can be entered for a de-
Answering a call automatically
vice name.
The navigation system automatically answers
incoming calls to the cellular phone, so you
can answer a call while driving without taking
your hands off the steering wheel.
Editing the password
You can change the password to be used for
authentication on your cellular phone. (De-
fault is [1111].)
p Four to eight characters can be entered for
a password.
1
Display the “Bluetooth Settings”
screen.
2
Touch [Auto Answer Preference].
The “Auto Answer Preference” screen ap-
pears.
1
Display the “Bluetooth Settings”
screen.
2
Touch [Password].
The “Set Password” screen appears.
3
Touch any key to enter the password
you want to set and then touch [OK].
88
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using hands-free phoning
12
1
Display the “Bluetooth Settings”
screen.
2
Touch [Clear Memory].
The “Clear Memory” screen appears.
3
Touch the desired option.
!
[Off]: No automatic response. Respond
manually
!
!
[Immediately]: Answers immediately
[After 3 seconds]: Answers after three sec-
onds
[After 6 seconds]: Answers after six sec-
onds
[After 10 seconds]: Answers after ten sec-
onds
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
!
!
!
!
!
!
Contacts:
You can clear the registered phone book.
Received Calls List:
You can clear the received call history list.
Dialed Calls List:
You can clear the dialed call history list.
Missed Calls List:
Setting the automatic rejection
function
If this function is on, the navigation system
automatically rejects all incoming calls.
You can clear the missed call history list.
#
Touch [Clear All].
It clears all the data that correspond to the con-
nected cellular phone.
1
Display the “Bluetooth Settings”
screen.
3
Touch [Yes].
2
Touch [Refuse All Calls].
Data on the selected item is cleared from this
navigation system’s memory.
p If you do not want to clear memory that you
Touching [Refuse All Calls] switches between
[On] and [Off].
p If both “Refuse All Calls” and “Auto An-
swer Preference” are activated, “Refuse
All Calls” takes priority and all incoming
calls are automatically rejected.
p If “Refuse All Calls” is set to [On], rejected
incoming calls will not be stored in the
missed call list.
have selected, touch [No].
Updating the Bluetooth
wireless technology software
Update files will be available for download in
the future. You will be able to download the lat-
est update from an appropriate website to
your PC.
p Before you download the files and install
the update, read through the instructions
on the website. Follow the instructions on
the website for steps until [Firmware up-
date] becomes active.
Clearing memory
You can clear the memory of each item that
corresponds to the connected cellular phone:
phone book, dialed/received/missed call his-
tory list and preset dials.
89
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
12
Using hands-free phoning
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD
instruction manual that came with your cel-
lular phone for detailed instructions.
With cellular phones, phone book transfer
may not work even though your phone is
paired with the navigation system. In that
case, disconnect your phone, perform pair-
ing again from your phone to the naviga-
tion system, and then perform the phone
book transfer.
card slot.
!
2
Display the “Bluetooth Settings”
screen.
3
Touch [Firmware update].
The current version is displayed.
Making and receiving calls
!
You may hear a noise in the following situa-
tions:
— When you answer the phone by using
the button on the phone.
— When the person on the other end of
line hangs up the phone.
!
!
!
If the person on the other end of the phone
call cannot hear the conversation due to an
echo, decrease the volume level for hands-
free phoning. This may reduce the echo.
With some cellular phones, even if you
press the accept button on the cellular
phone when a call comes in, hands-free
phoning may not be performed.
The registered name appears if the phone
number of the received call is already regis-
tered in the phone book. When one phone
number is registered under different
names, the name that comes first alphabe-
tically is displayed.
4
Touch [Firmware update].
Update starts.
Notes for hands-free phoning
General notes
!
Connection to all cellular phones featuring
Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar-
anteed.
!
The line-of-sight distance between this na-
vigation system and your cellular phone
must be 10 meters or less when sending
and receiving voice and data via Bluetooth
technology. However, the actual transmis-
sion distance may be shorter than the esti-
mated distance, depending on the usage
environment.
With some cellular phones, the speakers of
the system may not produce a ring sound.
If private mode is selected on the cellular
phone, hands-free phoning may be dis-
abled.
!
If the phone number of the received call is
not registered in the phone book, the
phone number of the received call appears.
The received call history and the dialed
number history
!
Calls made or editing performed only on
your cellular phone will not be reflected to
the dialed number history or phone book in
the navigation system.
You cannot make a call to the entry of an
unknown user (no phone number) in the re-
ceived call history.
If calls are made by operating your cellular
phone, no history data will be recorded in
the navigation system.
!
!
!
!
Registration and connection
!
Cellular phone operations vary depending
on the type of cellular phone. Refer to the
90
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using hands-free phoning
12
Phone book transfers
!
If there are more than 1 000 phone book en-
tries on your cellular phone, all entries may
not be able to be downloaded completely.
With some cellular phones, it may not be
possible to transfer all items in the phone
book at one time. In this case, transfer
items one by one from your cellular phone.
Depending on the cellular phone, this navi-
gation system may not display the phone
book correctly. (Some characters may be
garbled, or first name and last name may
be in reverse order.)
!
!
!
!
If the phone book in the cellular phone con-
tains image data, the phone book may not
be transferred correctly. (Image data can-
not be transferred from the cellular phone.)
Depending on the cellular phone, phone
book transfer may not be available.
91
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
13
Customizing preferences
Indicates the connection status of the GPS
antenna, the reception sensitivity, and from
how many satellites the signal is received.
The options in the “Navi
Settings” menu
Displaying the “Navi Settings”
screen
Signal com-
munication
Used in posi-
tioning
Color
1
Press the HOME button to display the
Orange
Yellow
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
“Top Menu”.
2
Touch [Settings].
p When the GPS antenna is connected to
this navigation system, [OK] is dis-
played.
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.
3
Touch [Navi Settings].
When the GPS antenna is not con-
nected to this navigation system, [NOK]
is displayed.
The “Navi Settings” menu appears.
p If reception is poor, please change the
installation position of the GPS antenna.
3 Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied, [On] is
displayed. When the parking brake is re-
leased, [Off] is displayed.
4 Power Voltage
The power voltage (reference value) pro-
vided from the vehicle battery to the naviga-
tion system is shown. If the voltage goes
out of the range from 11 V to 15 V, check
that power cable connection is correct.
5 Illumination
Checking the connections of leads
Check that leads are properly connected be-
tween the navigation system and the vehicle.
Please also check whether they are connected
in the correct positions.
When the headlights or small lamps of a ve-
hicle are on, [On] is displayed. When the
small lamps of a vehicle are off, [Off] is dis-
played. (If the orange/white lead is not con-
nected, [Off] appears.)
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.
2
Touch [Connection Status].
The “GPS Status” screen appears.
6 Back Signal
When the gear lever is shifted to “R”, the
signal switches to [High] or [Low]. (One of
these is displayed depending on the vehi-
cle.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Checking sensor learning
status and driving status
p The navigation system can automatically
use its sensor memory based on the outer
dimensions of the tires.
1 Speed Pulse
The Speed Pulse value detected by the navi-
gation system is shown. [0] is shown while
the vehicle is stationary.
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.
2 GPS ANT
92
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing preferences
13
2
Touch [3D Calibration Status].
Clearing status
The “3D Calibration Status” screen appears.
You can delete the learned results stored in
[Distance], [Speed Pulse] or [Learning Sta-
tus].
6
7
1
2
1
Touch [Distance] or [Speed Pulse].
The following message appears.
3
4
5
1 Speed
The speed detected by the navigation sys-
tem is indicated. (This indication may be
different from the actual speed of your vehi-
cle, so please do not use this instead of the
speedometer.)
2
Touch [Yes].
2 Acceleration or deceleration/Rotational
speed
Clears the learned results stored in [Distance]
or [Speed Pulse].
Acceleration or deceleration velocity of your
vehicle is indicated. Also, rotational speed
when your vehicle turns to left or right is
shown.
3
Touch [Learning Status].
The following message appears.
3 Distance
Driving distance is indicated.
4 Speed Pulse
Total number of speed pulses is indicated.
5 Learning Status
Current driving mode is indicated.
6 Inclination
Degree of slope of the street that you are
currently running is indicated.
7 Degree of learning
4
Touch [All].
Clears all learning statuses.
p Touch [All] for the following cases:
— After changing the installation position
of the navigation system
Sensor learning situations for distance
(Distance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn
(Left Turn) and 3D detection (3D) are indi-
cated by the length of bars.
p When tires have been changed or
chains fitted, turning on the Speed
Pulse allows the system to detect the
fact that the tire diameter has changed,
and automatically replaces the value for
calculating distance.
— After changing the installation angle of
the navigation system
— After moving the navigation system to
another vehicle
#
Touch [Distance].
Clears the learned results stored in [Distance].
p When the distance accuracy is low, touch
[Distance].
p If ND-PG1 is connected, the distance
calculation value cannot be replaced
automatically.
93
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
13
Customizing preferences
!
!
[Gas Unit]:
Set the fuel unit.
[Currency]:
Using the “Gas Mileage” function
Inputting the fuel consumption
information for calculating the fuel cost
Set the unit of currency.
You can estimate the fuel cost to your destina-
tion by entering the fuel consumption informa-
tion in the navigation system.
When all the items are entered, inputting the
fuel consumption information is complete.
Entering the fueling information
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.
When you enter the fueling information to the
navigation system, and export the data to SD
memory cards, you can check the fuel con-
sumption information by using the utility pro-
gram “AVIC FEEDS” which is available
separately, on your PC.
2
Touch [Gas Mileage].
The “Gas Mileage Setting” screen appears.
p Up to 24 sets of “Gas Price Calculation” en-
tries can be stored. You can also export the
data, as described below.
If the entries reach the maximum number,
a new entry will overwrite the oldest one.
3
tion.
Enter the fuel consumption informa-
Gas Mileage Management function only as-
sists you to calculate your average mileage
based on the information you input. The func-
tion does not receive data directly from the ve-
hicle.
Enter the following items:
!
[Surface Road Gas Mileage]:
Enter the fuel cost when you drive on ordin-
ary roads.
p How the fuel cost is entered depends on
the [Gas Unit] setting.
1
2
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.
— When [Gas Unit] is set to [Gallon].
Enter how many miles (kilometers)
you get to a gallon.
Touch [Gas Mileage].
The “Gas Mileage Setting” screen appears.
— When [Gas Unit] is set to [Liter].
Enter how much fuel you need to tra-
vel 60 miles (100 kilometers).
[Freeway Gas Mileage]:
!
Enter the fuel cost when you drive on the
freeway.
p How the fuel cost is entered depends on
the [Gas Unit] setting.
— When [Gas Unit] is set to [Gallon].
Enter how many miles (kilometers)
you get to a gallon.
3
Touch [Gas Price Calculation].
The “Gas Price Calculation” screen appears.
— When [Gas Unit] is set to [Liter].
Enter how much fuel you need to tra-
vel 60 miles (100 kilometers).
[Gas Price Per Unit]:
!
Enter the fuel unit price.
94
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing preferences
13
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
2
3
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.
Touch [Gas Mileage].
The “Gas Mileage Setting” screen appears.
4
Enter the following settings:
!
[Distance]:
Enter the distance traveled since the pre-
vious fueling.
p The distance is entered automatically
only when the distance traveled since
the previous fueling is recorded.
[Gas Pumped]:
Enter the amount of fuel pumped.
[Gas Price Per Unit]:
!
!
4
Touch [Export].
Enter the fuel unit price.
After a message confirming whether to export
the data appeared, exporting the data to the
SD memory card starts.
When all the items are entered, the fuel con-
sumption is displayed next to “Gas Mileage”.
The “Gas Mileage Setting” screen appears
when it is done.
Recording your travel history
Activating the track logger enables you to re-
cord your driving history (called “track log”
below). You can review the travel history later.
p If an SD memory card is inserted into the
SD card slot, the track logs will be stored in
the SD memory card.
5
Touch [OK].
The “Gas Mileage Setting” screen appears.
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD
Exporting the data of “Gas Mileage
Management”
card slot.
Exporting the “Gas Mileage Management”
data to an SD memory card is possible.
p The data stored in this navigation system
will be cleared as exporting it to the SD
memory card.
p If there is a previous data in the SD mem-
ory card, the data is overwritten with new
data when current data is exported.
2
3
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.
Touch [Drive Log Settings].
The “Drive Log Settings” screen appears.
4
Touch [Drive Log Settings].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
95
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
13
Customizing preferences
!
!
[On]:
2
Touch [Set Home].
You can export your track log to the SD
card.
[Off] (default):
The “Set Home” screen appears.
You cannot export your track log to the SD
card.
#
Touch [Type].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
!
!
!
[Private] (default):
Set the track log attribute to “Private”.
[Business]:
Set the track log attribute to “Business”.
[Other]:
Set the track log attribute to “Other”.
3
Touch [Home].
The “Select Search method” screen appears.
Touch [Phone #].
#
When you have already registered your home,
you can edit your home number.
p While the setting is [On], the navigation
system continues to store the track logs in
the inserted SD memory card.
4
Search for a location.
After searching for a point, display it on a
map, then touch [OK].
The location is registered, and then the “Set
Home” screen appears.
Using the demonstration guidance
This is a demonstration function for retail
stores. After a route is set, touching this key
starts the simulation of route guidance.
= For details, refer to Chapter 8.
5
Touch [OK].
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.
The registration is completed.
2
Touch [Demo Mode].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
Correcting the current location
Touch the screen to adjust the current position
and direction of the vehicle displayed on the
map.
!
[On]:
Repeat demo drive.
[Off] (default):
Demo Mode is set off.
!
1
2
3
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.
Touch [Modify Current Location].
Scroll to the position where you want
3
Display the map screen.
The demonstration guidance will begin.
to set, then touch [OK].
Registering your home
Registering your home position saves time
and effort. Also, routes to home positions can
be calculated easily with a single touch of the
key from the “Destination Menu”. The regis-
tered home position can also be modified
later.
Options on the “System
Settings” menu
Displaying the “System
Settings” screen
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.
1
Press the HOME button to display the
“Top Menu”.
96
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing preferences
13
2
Touch [Settings].
5
Touch the desired language.
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.
After the language is selected, the screen re-
turns to the previous screen.
3
Touch [System Settings].
The “System Settings” screen appears.
6
Touch [OK] on the “Regional Settings”
screen.
A message confirming whether to restart the
navigation system appears.
7
Touch [OK].
The navigation system restarts.
Press the MODE button or the HOME button.
#
Cancels the setting of the languages.
Setting the time difference
Adjusts the systems clock. Set the time differ-
ence (+, –) from the time originally set in your
navigation system.
Customizing the regional settings
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.
2
Touch [Regional Settings].
1
Display the “Regional Settings” screen.
The “Regional Settings” screen appears.
2
Touch [Time].
The “Time Settings” screen appears.
Selecting the language
3
[–].
To set the time difference, touch [+] or
You can set the languages used on the pro-
gram and voice guidance. Each language can
be set separately.
The time difference between the time origin-
ally set in the navigation system (Pacific Stan-
dard Time) and the current location of your
vehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the time
difference. Touching [+] or [–] changes the
time difference display in one-hour incre-
ments.
1
Display the “Regional Settings” screen.
2
Touch [Program Language].
The language list is displayed.
3
Touch the desired language.
After the language is selected, the screen re-
turns to the previous screen.
The time difference can be set from –4 to +9
hours.
4
Touch [Voice Language].
4
Touch [Summer Time].
The “Voice Language Selection” screen ap-
If necessary, set to summer time.
pears.
97
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
13
Customizing preferences
Summer time is off by default. Touch [Sum-
mer Time] to change the time if you are in the
summer time period. This turns the display
below summer time [On].
5
Touch [Time format].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
!
[12H] (default):
Switching the display for 12 hours with am/
pm.
[24H]:
3
4
Touch [+] or [–] to set the speed.
p The estimated time of arrival is not necessa-
rily estimated based on this speed value.
!
Switching the display for 24 hours.
Touch [OK].
The settings are completed.
Changing the unit between km and miles
This setting controls the unit of distance and
speed displayed on your navigation system.
Setting the Volume for
Guidance and Phone
1
Display the “Regional Settings” screen.
The sound volume for the navigation can be
set. You can separately set the volume of the
route guidance and the beep sound.
2
Touch [km / mile].
A message confirming whether to change the
setting appears.
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.
3
Touch [Yes].
It changes the settings as follows:
2
Touch [Volume].
!
!
!
[mile] (default):
Show distance in miles.
[Mile&Yard]:
Show distance in miles and yards.
[km]:
The “Volume Settings” screen appears.
Show distance in kilometers.
#
Touch [No].
Cancels the setting.
Changing the virtual speed of the vehicle
3
Touch the key next to “Beep”.
When calculating the expected time of arrival
and the number of hours to the destination,
set the average speed for the freeway or ordin-
ary roads using [+] and [–].
Each time you touch the key changes that set-
ting.
!
[On] (default):
A beep sounds.
[Off]:
1
Display the “Regional Settings” screen.
!
Muting the beep sound.
2
Touch [Speed].
The “Average Speed Settings” screen ap-
pears.
4
Touch [+] or [–] to set their volume.
On this screen, you can operate the following
items.
!
[Guidance]
98
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing preferences
13
This setting controls the guidance volume
of navigation.
p Splash screen images should be used with-
in the following formats;
p When set to , guidance is output.
When set to , no guidance is output.
[Phone Ringtone]
This setting controls the incoming ring tone
volume.
— BMP or JPEG files
— Allowable horizontal and vertical size
are 2 592 pixels x 1 944 pixels or smaller
— Allowable data size is 6 MB or smaller
p Proper compatibility with allowable files is
not guaranteed.
!
!
[Phone Voice]
This setting controls the incoming voice vo-
lume.
p Imported original images will be stored in
the built-in memory, but the ability to save
these images cannot be guaranteed com-
pletely. If your original image data is de-
leted, insert the SD memory card again
and re-import the original image.
p Phone Ringtone and Phone Voice adjust-
ments are related to the cellular phone fea-
turing Bluetooth technology. No
adjustment is needed when the cellular
phone featuring Bluetooth technology is
not connected.
1
Create a folder named “Pictures” on the
top-most directory of the SD memory card
and store the picture files in this folder.
p Volume of the AV source is adjusted by
VOL (+/–) button.
2
Store the picture files in “Pictures”.
3
Insert an SD memory card into the SD
5
To finish the setting, touch [OK].
card slot.
Changing the splash screen
You can change the splash screen to the other
images stored in the navigation system.
4
5
Display the “System Settings” screen.
Touch [Splash Screen].
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.
The “Select Splash Screen” screen appears.
2
Touch [Splash Screen].
6
Touch [Select from SD].
The “Select Splash Screen” screen appears.
The “Select Splash Screen” screen appears.
3
Touch the image to use as the splash
7
Touch the image to use as the splash
screen from the list.
screen from the list.
The image is displayed on the screen.
The image is displayed on the screen.
4
Touch [OK].
8
Touch [OK].
The image is set as the splash screen, and the
system returns to the “System Settings”
menu.
The image is set as the splash screen, and the
system returns to the “System Settings”
menu.
Changing to the splash screen
stored in the SD memory card
You can change the splash screen that ap-
pears when the navigation system starts. Copy
your chosen image to the SD memory card,
and select the image to import.
Setting for rear view camera
The following two functions are available. The
rear view camera feature requires a separately
sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC2). (For de-
tails, consult your dealer.)
99
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
13
Customizing preferences
Rear view camera
Adjusting the response
positions of the touch panel
(touch panel calibration)
If you feel that the touch panel keys on the
screen deviate from the actual positions that
respond to your touch, adjust the response po-
sitions of the touch panel screen.
The navigation system features a function that
automatically switches to the full-screen rear
view camera image installed on your vehicle.
When the shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) po-
sition, the screen automatically switches to
full-screen rear view camera.
Camera for Rear view mode
p Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as a
ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen, which
could damage the screen.
[Rear View] can be displayed at all times (e.g.
when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a
split screen where map information is partially
displayed. Please be aware that with this set-
ting, camera image is not resized to fit, and
that a portion of what is seen by the camera is
not viewable.
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.
2
Touch [Screen Calibration].
A message confirming whether to start the ca-
libration appears.
3
Gently touch the center of + mark dis-
CAUTION
played on the screen.
Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which
outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise the
screen image may appear reversed.
The target indicates the order.
After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-
tion data is saved.
p Do not turn off the engine while saving the
p Immediately verify whether the display
changes to a rear view camera image when
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R)
from another position.
p When the screen changes to full-screen
rear view camera image during normal
driving, switch to the opposite setting in
[Polarity].
adjusted position data.
#
Press the MODE button.
Returns to the previous adjustment position.
Press and hold the MODE button.
#
Cancels the adjustment.
Setting the illumination color
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.
The illumination color can be selected from 11
different colors. Furthermore, the illumination
color can switched between these 11 colors in
order.
2
Touch [Back Camera].
The “Back Camera Settings” screen appears.
To set the illumination color, display the “Illu-
mination Color” screen.
3
Touch [Camera] to turn it [On].
p You can only switch to “Rear View” if this
setting is [On].
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.
4
Touch [Battery] or [GND] next to
2
Touch [Illumi Color].
“Polarity” to select the appropriate polarity
setting.
The “Illumination Color” screen appears.
!
Battery — When the polarity of the con-
nected lead is positive while the shift lever
is in the REVERSE (R) position
!
GND — When the polarity of the connected
lead is negative while the shift lever is in
the REVERSE (R) position
100
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing preferences
13
3
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the values for
Red, Green and Blue to create a favorite
color.
Watch the illumination of hardware keys while
adjusting the color.
Each time you touch [+] or [–] increases or de-
creases the value of the selected item. +31 to
+00 is displayed as the value is increased or
decreased.
p An entry cannot be stored with all of the va-
Selecting the color from the preset
colors
lues set to “+00”.
4
Touch [Memory 1], [Memory 2] or
[Memory 3] to store the illumination color.
1
Display the “Illumination Color” screen.
2
Touch the color you want.
5
Touch [OK] to return to the previous
Available options;
screen.
!
Colored keys — Selects the desired preset
color
!
Memory 1/Memory 2/Memory 3 — Col-
ors registered in the memory
Checking the version information
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.
2
Touch [Service Information].
The “Service Information Screen” screen ap-
pears.
!
Scan — Shifts between the eight default
colors in sequence gradually.
3
Check the version information.
Creating a user-defined color and
storing it to memory
You can create a user-defined color and set it
as the illumination color.
Replicating the settings
You can import settings you have made on the
utility program “AVIC FEEDS” which is avail-
able separately to the navigation system.
1
Display the “Illumination Color” screen.
2
Touch [Custom].
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD
The “Illumination Color” screen appears.
card slot.
2
Press the HOME button to display the
“Top Menu”.
3
Touch [Settings].
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.
4
Touch [Setting Replicator].
p If [Scan] is set, [Custom] cannot be se-
A message confirming whether to update the
settings appears.
lected.
101
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
13
Customizing preferences
5
Touch [Yes].
Update starts.
After updating the settings is finished, a mes-
sage confirming whether to restart the naviga-
tion system appears.
6
Touch [OK].
The navigation system restarts.
Turning off the screen
By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,
you can turn off the screen display without
turning off the voice guidance.
%
Touch [Screen Off] on the “Settings
Menu” menu.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
The screen is turned off.
p Touch anywhere on the screen to turn it
back on.
102
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the radio (FM)
14
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-
tion system. This section describes operations
for radio (FM).
Using the touch panel keys
1
%
Touch [FM] on the “AV Source” menu to
display the “FM” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
2
3
4
Reading the screen
1
2 3 4
56
1 Display the “Function” menu
2 Select a preset channel
7
8
[c] or [d] can be used to switch preset chan-
nels.
3 Perform manual tuning
9
To tune manually, touch [c] or [d] briefly. The
frequencies move up or down one step at a
time.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Band indicator
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1
to FM3.
3 Signal level indicator
4 Preset number indicator
Shows what preset item has been selected.
5 Frequency indicator
Perform seek tuning
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [c] or
[d] for about one second and release. The
tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-
cast strong enough for good reception is
found.
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching
either [c] or [d] briefly.
p If you touch and hold [c] or [d], you
can skip broadcasting frequencies.
Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-
lease the keys.
6 Current time
7 Program service name indicator
Shows the program service name (station
name) of the current station.
8 LOCAL indicator
Shows when local seek tuning is on.
9 STEREO indicator
p You can also perform these operations
by using the TRK (c/d) button.
4 Select an FM band
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired FM
band is displayed, FM1, FM2 or FM3.
p This function is convenient for preparing
different preset lists for each band.
Shows that the frequency selected is being
broadcast in stereo.
103
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
14
Using the radio (FM)
2
The next time you touch the same pre-
Switching between the
detailed information display
and the preset list display
You can switch the left side of the basic screen
according to your preference.
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station
frequencies are recalled from memory.
p You can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio
stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]
to [P6].
Using the “Function” menu
1
Touch [FM] on the “AV Source” menu to
display the “FM” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
2
Touch
.
%
Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).
Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes
the detailed information display or preset list
display.
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also
with the touch of a key).
1
2
1 Storing the strongest broadcast fre-
quencies
2 Tuning in strong signals
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies
“BSM” (best stations memory) lets you auto-
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1] to
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to
these frequencies with the touch of a key.
Preset tuning keys
1
When you find a frequency that you
want to store in memory, touch and hold a
preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-
set number (e.g., P. C 1) is appears.
The selected radio station has been stored in
memory.
1
Touch [BSM].
p Up to 18 FM stations, 6 for each of the three
FM bands, as well as 6 AM stations can be
stored in memory.
104
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the radio (FM)
14
2
Touch [Start] to start “BSM”.
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing,
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be
stored under the preset tuning keys [P1] to
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When
this is complete, BSM stops flashing.
p To cancel the storage process, touch
[Stop].
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have already saved by using [P1] to [P6].
Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only
those radio stations with sufficiently strong
signals for good reception.
1
Touch [Local].
2
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].
3
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-
sitivity.
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.
Level: 1 — 2 — 3 — 4
p The level “4” setting allows reception of only
the strongest stations, while lower settings
let you receive weaker stations.
105
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
15
Using the radio (AM)
You can listen to the radio using this naviga-
tion system. This section describes operations
for radio (AM).
2 Select a preset channel
c or d can be used to switch presets.
3 Perform manual tuning
%
Touch [AM] on the “AV Source” menu
to display the “AM” screen.
To tune manually, touch [c] or [d] briefly. The
frequencies move up or down one step at a
time.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
Perform seek tuning
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [c] or
[d] for about one second and release. The
tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-
cast strong enough for good reception is
found.
Reading the screen
1
2 3 4
56
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching
either [c] or [d] briefly.
p If you touch and hold [c] or [d], you
can skip broadcasting frequencies.
Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-
lease the keys.
p You can also perform these operations
by using the TRK (c/d) button.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 LOCAL indicator
Shows when local seek tuning is on.
3 Signal level indicator
4 Preset number indicator
Shows what preset item has been selected.
5 Frequency indicator
Switching between the
detailed information display
and the preset list display
You can switch the left side of the basic screen
according to your preference.
6 Current time
Using the touch panel keys
1
2
%
Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).
Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes
the detailed information display or preset list
display.
3
1 Display the “Function” menu
106
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the radio (AM)
15
1 Storing the strongest broadcast fre-
quencies
2 Tuning in strong signals
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also
with the touch of a key).
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies
“BSM” (best stations memory) lets you auto-
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1] to
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to
these frequencies with the touch of a key.
%
Touch [Start] to turn BSM on.
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing,
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be
stored under the preset tuning keys [P1] to
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When
this is complete, BSM stops flashing.
p To cancel the storage process, touch
[Stop].
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have already saved by using [P1] to [P6].
Preset tuning keys
1
When you find a frequency that you
want to store in memory, touch and hold a
preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-
set number (e.g., P. C 1) is appears.
The selected radio station has been stored in
memory.
2
The next time you touch the same pre-
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station
frequencies are recalled from memory.
p You can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio
stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]
to [P6].
Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only
those radio stations with sufficiently strong
signals for good reception.
1
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.
Using the “Function” menu
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].
1
Touch [AM] on the “AV Source” menu
2
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-
to display the “AM” screen.
sitivity.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
There are two levels of sensitivity for AM.
Level: 1 — 2
2
Touch
.
p The level “2” setting allows reception of only
the strongest stations, while lower settings
let you receive weaker stations.
1
2
107
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
16
HD RadioäReception
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-
tion system. This section describes operations
for HD Radio reception.
Using the touch panel keys
1
p For details concerning operation, refer to
the HD Radio tuner’s operation manual.
%
Touch [Digital Radio] on the “AV
Source” menu to display the “Digital
Radio” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
2
3
4
Reading the screen
1 Display the “Function” menu
2 Select a preset channel
1
2
3
4
56
[c] or [d] can be used to switch presets chan-
nels.
3 Perform manual tuning
7
8
9
a
b
To tune manually, touch [c] or [d] briefly. The
frequencies move up or down one step at a
time.
Perform seek tuning
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [c] or
[d] for about one second and release. The
tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-
cast strong enough for good reception is
found.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Band indicator
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1,
FM2, FM3 or AM.
3 Preset number indicator
Shows what preset item has been selected.
4 Multicasting indicator
Shows the number of multicast channels in
the current frequency.
5 Frequency indicator
6 Current time
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching
either [c] or [d] briefly.
p If you touch and hold [c] or [d], you
can skip broadcasting frequencies.
Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-
lease the keys.
p You can also perform these operations
by using the TRK (c/d) button.
4 Select a band
7 Detailed information
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired
band is displayed: FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM.
p This function is convenient for preparing
different preset lists for each band.
8 Signal level indicator
9 Blending mode indicator
a Signal type indicator
Shows the type of signal currently being re-
ceived. If a digital broadcasting is received,
“D” appears. Otherwise, “A” appears.
b Seek type indicator
108
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
HD RadioäReception
16
2
The next time you touch the same pre-
Switching between the
detailed information display
and the preset list display
You can switch the left side of the basic screen
according to your preference.
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station
frequencies are recalled from memory.
p You can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio
stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]
to [P6].
Switching the display
Desired information can be displayed.
%
Touch [Disp].
Touch [Disp] repeatedly to switch between the
following settings:
Channel name — Artist name — Song title —
Program type
p Only when the tuner has been tuned in to
an HD Radio broadcasting, display can be
changed.
p When the tuner has been tuned in to an HD
Radio broadcasting, default display is chan-
ged into station name instead of frequency.
%
Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).
Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes
the detailed information display or preset list
display.
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also
with the touch of a key).
#
Touch and hold [Disp].
You can turn the detailed information scroll mode
on and off.
Using the “Function” menu
1
Touch [Digital Radio] on the “AV
Source” menu to display the “Digital
Radio” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
2
Touch
.
Preset tuning keys
1
When you find a frequency that you
want to store in memory, touch and hold a
preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-
set number (e.g., P. C 1) is appears.
The selected radio station has been stored in
memory.
1
2
3
4
1 Storing the strongest broadcast fre-
quencies
2 Switching the seek mode
109
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
16
HD RadioäReception
3 Tuning in strong signals
2
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-
sitivity.
4 Switching the reception mode
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and
two levels for AM:
FM: 1 — 2 — 3 — 4
AM: 1 — 2
p The FM “4” (AM “2”) setting allows recep-
tion of only the strongest stations, while
lower settings let you receive weaker sta-
tions.
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies
“BSM” (best stations memory) lets you auto-
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1] to
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to
these frequencies with the touch of a key.
Switching the reception mode
If a digital broadcast reception condition gets
poor, the tuner automatically switches to the
analog broadcast of the same frequency level
in default. If you want to prevent a frequent
automatic switching, switch this setting to
[Analog].
%
Touch [Start] to turn BSM on.
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing,
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be
stored under the preset tuning keys [P1] to
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When
this is complete, BSM stops flashing.
p To cancel the storage process, touch
[Stop].
%
Touch [Blending] to switch the recep-
tion mode.
!
!
[Analog]:
Receives analog broadcasting only.
[Auto]:
Automatically switches to the analog broad-
cast of the same frequency level as the digi-
tal broadcast.
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have already saved by using [P1] to [P6].
p If you select “Analog” on this setting while
[Seek] is set to “HD”, the setting on [Seek]
turns to “All” automatically.
Switching the seek mode
You can select the method of seek tuning.
%
Touch [Seek] to select the desired set-
ting.
!
[All]:
Seeks stations from both analog and digital
broadcasting.
!
[HD]:
Seeks from digital broadcasting only.
p If you select “HD” on this setting while
[Blending] is set to “Analog”, the setting
on [Blending] turns to “Auto” automati-
cally.
Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only
those radio stations with sufficiently strong
signals for good reception.
1
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].
110
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Playing audio CDs
17
You can play a normal music CD using the
built-in drive of the navigation system. This
section describes how.
All tracks in the current disc
are played in random order.
Disc Random
Disc Scan
The beginning of each track
is played for about 10 sec-
onds.
1
Insert the disc you want to play into
disc-loading slot.
Playback starts from the first track of the CD.
4 Play time indicator
2
Touch [Disc] on the “AV Source” menu
to display the “CD” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current track.
5 Current time
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen
6 Song number indicator
Shows the number of the track and the total
number of tracks in the repeat range.
7 Track title indicator
Shows the title of the track currently playing
(when available).
8 Artist name indicator
to control the disc.
Reading the screen
1
2
3
45
Shows the artist name currently playing
(when available).
9 Album title indicator
6
Shows the title of the album for the current
track (when available).
7
8
9
Using the touch panel keys
Touch panel keys
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Track number indicator
1
Shows the number of the track currently play-
ing.
3 Playback condition indicator
The marks shown below appears and indi-
cates the current playback condition.
2
3
4
5
: Scan play
: Random play
: Repeat play
1 Display the “Function” menu
Indicator
Meaning
2 Switch the media file type played
3 Skip the track forward or backward
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
track. Touching [o] once skips to the start
of the current track. Touching it again will skip
to the previous track.
All tracks in the current disc
are played repeatedly. This is
the default condition.
Disc Repeat
The current track is played
repeatedly.
Track Repeat
111
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
17
Playing audio CDs
Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind
or fast forward.
2
Touch
.
p Fast reverse is canceled when it reaches
the beginning of the first track on the
disc.
p You can also perform these operations
by using TRK (c/d) button.
4 Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
5 Shuffle All
1
2
3
4
All of the songs in the disc can be played at
random by touching only one key.
p To cancel random play, switch [Ran-
dom] to [Off] on the “Function”
menu.
1 Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
!
!
Disc — Repeats the current disc
Track — Repeats just the current track
p If you perform track search or fast for-
ward/rewind, repeat play is automati-
cally canceled.
Selecting a track from the list
The list lets you see the list of track titles on a
disc and select one of them to play.
2 Play tracks in a random order
Touching [Random] switches between [On]
and [Off].
1
2
Touch [List].
3 Scan tracks of a CD
Touching [Scan] switches between [On]
and [Off]. Scan play lets you hear the first
10 seconds of each track on the CD. When
you find the track you want, touch [Scan] to
turn scan play off.
Touch the track you want to play.
p After scanning is finished, normal play-
back of the tracks will begin again.
4 Using advanced sound retriever
Advanced sound retriever function automa-
tically enhances compressed audio and re-
stores rich sound.
Each touch of [Sound Retriever] changes
the setting as follows:
The track currently playing is highlighted.
Touching or switches the selection to the
next or previous page in the list.
p The “–” mark is displayed if there is no cor-
responding information.
!
!
!
MODE 1 — Activates advanced sound
retriever function.
MODE 2 — Activates advanced sound
retriever function.
Off — Deactivates advanced sound re-
triever function.
3
To return to the previous screen, touch
[Detail].
p MODE 2 is more effective than
MODE 1.
Using the “Function” menu
1
Touch [Disc] on the “AV Source” menu
to display the “CD” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
112
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Playing music files on ROM
18
You can play a disc that contains compressed
audio files using the built-in drive of the navi-
gation system. This section describes these
operations.
p In the following description, the MP3,
WMA, AAC files are collectively referred to
as “Compressed audio file”.
Indicator
Meaning
All audio files in the disc are
played repeatedly. This is the
default condition.
Disc Repeat
All audio files in the current
folder are played repeatedly.
Folder Repeat
Track Repeat
The current file is played re-
peatedly.
1
Insert the disc you want to play into
disc-loading slot.
Playback starts from the first file of the ROM.
All audio files in the current
disc are played in random
order.
Disc Random
Folder Random
Disc Scan
2
Touch [Disc] on the “AV Source” menu
to display the “ROM” screen.
All audio files in the current
folder are played in random
order.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
3
Use this ROM screen to play the disc.
The beginning of the first
audio files of each folder is
played for about 10 seconds.
The beginning of each file in
the current folder is played
for about 10 seconds.
Folder Scan
Reading the screen
1
2 3 4 5 6
78
6 File type indicator
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.
7 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current track.
8 Current time
9
a
b
c
9 File number indicator
Shows the number of the file and the total
number of files in the repeat range.
a Track title indicator
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Folder number indicator
Shows the folder number currently playing.
3 Folder name indicator
Shows the folder name currently playing.
4 File indicator
Shows the file number currently playing.
5 Playback condition indicator
The marks shown below appears and indi-
cates the current playback condition.
Shows the title of the track currently playing
(when available).
p If the title of a track is not available, the
file name appears.
b Artist name indicator
Shows the artist name currently playing
(when available).
c Album title indicator
Shows the title of the album for the current
track (when available).
: Scan play
: Random play
: Repeat play
113
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
18
Playing music files on ROM
All of the songs in the disc can be played at
random by touching only one key.
Using the touch panel keys
1
p If the disc contains a mixture of various
media file types, all tracks within the
current part (“CD” or “ROM”) are played
randomly.
p To cancel random play, switch [Ran-
dom] to [Off] on the “Function” menu.
2
3
4
5
Selecting a track from the list
The list lets you see the list of track titles or
folder names on a disc. Touch a folder on the
list to view its contents. You can play a track
on the list by touching it.
1 Display the “Function” menu
2 Switch the media file type played
When playing a disc containing a mixture of
various media file types, you can switch be-
tween media files types to play.
1
Touch [List].
The contents of the folder in which the cur-
rently playing file is located are displayed.
Touch [Media] repeatedly to switch between
the following media file types:
2
Touch the folder that you want to view.
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) — ROM (com-
pressed audio file) — DivX (DivX video files)
p This touch panel key appears only when
playing a disc containing a mixture of
various media file types.
3 Skip the track forward or backward
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
track. Touching [o] once skips to the start
of the current track. Touching it again will skip
to the previous track.
The track currently playing is highlighted.
Touching or switches the selection to the
next or previous page in the list.
Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind
or fast forward.
p Fast rewind stops when it reaches the
beginning of the first file on the repeat
range.
p In the case of compressed audio files,
there is no sound on fast rewind or for-
ward.
Touching
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder
is listed, cannot be used.
displays the content of the upper
3
Touch the track you want to play.
p To cancel the list screen, touch [Detail].
p You can also perform these operations
by using TRK (c/d) button.
Using the “Function” menu
4 Playback and Pause
1
Touch [Disc] on the “AV Source” menu
to display the “ROM” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
5 Shuffle All
114
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Playing music files on ROM
18
Touching [Scan] switches between [On]
and [Off]. When you find the track you
want, touch [Scan] to turn scan play off.
p After completion of track or folder scan-
ning, normal playback of the tracks will
begin again.
2
Touch
.
p If you turn [Scan] to [On] when the re-
peat play range is set to [Track], the re-
peat play range changes to [Folder]
automatically.
p If you turn [Scan] to [On] while the re-
peat play range is set to [Disc], scan
play is performed for only the first tracks
of each folder.
1
2
3
4
1 Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
4 Using advanced sound retriever
Advanced sound retriever function automa-
tically enhances compressed audio and re-
stores rich sound.
!
Disc — Repeats all compressed audio
files
Track — Repeats just the current track
Folder — Repeats the current folder
!
!
Each touch of [Sound Retriever] changes
the setting as follows:
p If you select another folder during repeat
play, the repeat play range changes to
[Disc].
p If you perform fast forward/rewind dur-
ing [Track], the repeat play range
changes to [Folder].
p When [Folder] is selected, it is not pos-
sible to play back a subfolder of that
folder.
p When playing discs with compressed
audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-
peat play is performed within the cur-
rently playing data session even if [Disc]
is selected.
!
!
!
MODE 1 — Activates advanced sound
retriever function.
MODE 2 — Activates advanced sound
retriever function.
Off — Deactivates advanced sound re-
triever function.
p MODE 2 is more effective than
MODE 1.
2 Play tracks in a random order
Touching [Random] switches between [On]
and [Off]. When using ROM, the tracks in
the current repeat play range are randomly
played.
p If you turn [Random] to [On] when the
repeat play range is set to [Track], the re-
peat play range changes to [Folder]
automatically.
3 Scan folders and tracks
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds
of each track. Scan play is performed in the
current repeat play range.
115
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
19
Playing a DVD-Video
You can play a DVD-Video using the built-in
drive of the navigation system. This section de-
scribes operations for playing a DVD-Video.
Using the touch panel keys
Playback screen (page1)
1
Reading the screen
2
1
2
3
4
56
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
8
9
Playback screen (page2)
1
7
8
9 ab
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Title number indicator
a
b
Shows the title number currently playing.
3 Chapter number indicator
Shows the chapter currently playing.
4 Digital sound format indicator
Shows which digital sound format (surround
sound format) has been selected.
5 Play time indicator
c
5
6
d
e
Playback screen (page3)
1
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current title.
6 Current time
7 Audio track indicator
f
g
h
Shows the audio track number and audio lan-
guage currently selected.
8 Audio channel indicator
Shows the current audio channel type, such
as “Mch” (Multi-channel).
5
6
9 Subtitle number indicator
Shows the subtitle number currently selected.
a Subtitle language indicator
Shows the subtitle language currently se-
lected.
b Viewing angle indicator
Shows what viewing angle has been
selected.
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-
played, meaning that the operation is not
valid.
1 Display the “Function” menu
2 Display the DVD menu
116
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Playing a DVD-Video
19
You can display the menu by touching [Menu]
or [Top Menu] while a disc is playing. Touch-
ing either of these keys again lets you start
playback from the location selected from the
menu. For details, refer to the instructions pro-
vided with the disc.
[f], [m] or [n] opposite to key pushed
for five seconds.
d Searching for a desired scene and starting
playback from a specified time
3 Skip forward or backward
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the
start of the current chapter. Touching it again
will skip to the previous chapter.
e Perform an operation (such as resuming)
that is stored on the disc
When using a DVD that has a point recorded
that indicates where to return to, the DVD re-
turns to the specified point and begins play-
back from that point.
p You can also perform these operations
by using the TRK (c/d) button.
4 Playback and Pause
f Change the viewing angle (Multi-angle)
Each touch of [Angle] switches between view-
ing angles.
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
5 Switch the display
p During playback of a scene shot from
Touching [Disp] changes the indication on the
information plate as follows:
Disc information display — Repeat range and
L/R select display
multiple angles, the angle icon
is
displayed. Turn the angle icon display
on or off using the “DVD/DivX® Setup”
menu.
6 Hide the touch panel keys
g Change the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the
subtitle languages.
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display
the touch panel keys again.
7 Display the DVD menu keypad
8 Switch next page of touch panel keys
9 Stop playback
a Skip the title forward or backward
Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title.
Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous
title.
h Change audio language and audio sys-
tems (Multi-audio)
Each touch of [Audio] switches between
audio languages and audio systems.
p DTS audio cannot be output, so select
an audio setting other than DTS.
p Display indications such as MPEG-A
and Mch indicate the audio system re-
corded on the DVD. Depending on the
setting, playback may not use the same
audio system as that indicated.
b Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion
playback)
c Fast reverse or forward
Resuming playback (Bookmark)
The Bookmark function lets you resume play-
back from a selected scene the next time the
disc is loaded.
Touch [m] or [n] to perform fast reverse or
forward.
If you touch and hold [m] or [n] for five
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues
even if you release either of these keys. To re-
sume playback at a desired point, touch
117
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
19
Playing a DVD-Video
%
Touching [BookM.]:
Direct number search
You can use this function when you need to
enter a numerical command during DVD play-
back.
You can bookmark one point for each of up to
five discs. If you try to memorize another point
for the same disc, the oldest bookmark will be
overwritten by the newest one.
p To clear the bookmark on a disc, touch and
1
Touch [10Key].
hold [BookM.].
2
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired
number.
Searching for a specific scene
and starting playback from a
specified time
3
While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
You can search for the scene you want by spe-
cifying a title or a chapter, and the time.
p Chapter search and time search are not
possible when disc playback has been
stopped.
Operating the DVD menu
You can operate the DVD menu by touching
the menu item on the screen directly.
p This function can be used when the
key is displayed on the lower right corner of
the LCD screen.
p This function may not work properly with
some DVD disc content. In that case, use
touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu.
1
Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]
(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time).
p If you touch the screen while
is dis-
played, the touch panel keys will not be dis-
played.
1
Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
2
Touch [Top Menu] or [Menu] to display
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-
touch panel keys to operate the DVD
menu.
ber or time and then touch [Enter].
For titles, chapters
!
!
To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.
To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in
order.
3
#
Touch the desired menu item.
Touch
.
The touch panel keys to select the menu item are
displayed.
For time (time search)
!
!
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],
[min], [0], [3] and [Enter] in order.
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [min], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.
To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch
[1], [0], [0], [5], [s] and [Enter] in order.
Using DVD menu by touch
panel keys
If items on the DVD menu appear, the touch
panel keys may overlay them. If so, select an
item using those touch panel keys.
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].
To cancel the input numbers, touch and
hold [Clear].
118
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Playing a DVD-Video
19
p To return to normal playback, touch [f].
1
Touch [a], [b], [c] or [d] to select the
desired menu item.
2
Touch [q] or [r] to adjust playback
speed during slow motion playback.
Each time you touch [q] or [r] it changes
the speed in four steps in the following order:
1/16 f 1/8 f 1/4 f 1/2
p There is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
p With some discs, images may be unclear
during slow motion playback.
p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
p If the touch panel keys for DVD menu selec-
tion disappear, touching anywhere on the
screen, then touching
again.
displays them
Using the “Function” menu
2
Touch [Enter].
1
Touch [Disc] on the “AV Source” menu
Playback starts from the selected menu item.
The way to display the menu differs depending
on the disc.
to display the “DVD-V” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
#
Touch [Position].
Each touch of [Position] changes the display po-
sition of touch panel keys.
2
Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
#
Touch [Hide].
The touch panel keys are hidden.
3
Touch
.
And
is displayed, so you can select a
menu item by touching the screen.
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time
during playback.
%
Touch [r] during playback.
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead
one frame.
1
2
3
1 Repeating play
To return to normal playback, touch [f].
p With some discs, images may be unclear
during frame-by-frame playback.
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
!
Disc — Plays throughout the current
disc
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
!
!
Title — Repeats just the current title
Chapter — Repeats just the current
chapter
1
Touch and hold [r] until
played during playback.
The icon is displayed, and forward slow
motion playback begins.
is dis-
p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast
forward/rewind or slow motion playback,
the repeat play range changes to [Disc].
119
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
19
Playing a DVD-Video
p This function is not available when disc
playback has been stopped.
2 Selecting audio output
When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM
audio, you can switch the audio output.
Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until the de-
sired audio output appears in the display.
Each touch of [L/R Select] changes the set-
tings as follows:
!
!
!
!
L+R — Left and right
L — Left
R — Right
Mix — Mixing left and right
p This function is not available when disc
playback has been stopped.
3 DVD setup adjustments
120
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Playing a DVD-VR disc
20
You can play a DVD-VR (DVD Video Recording
Format) disc using the built-in drive of the na-
vigation system. This section describes opera-
tions for DVD-VR discs.
Using the touch panel keys
Playback screen (page1)
1
2
Reading the screen
3
4
1
2
3
4
56
5
6
7
8
9
a
Playback screen (page2)
1
7
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Title number indicator
Shows the title number currently playing.
3 Chapter number indicator
Shows the chapter currently playing.
4 Digital sound format indicator
Shows which digital sound format (surround
sound format) has been selected.
5 Play time indicator
8
9
a
b
c
d
e
6
7
f g
9
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-
played, meaning that the operation is not
valid.
1 Display the “Function” menu
2 c CM Skip/CM Skip d
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current title.
6 Current time
7 Audio track indicator
Shows the audio track number currently se-
lected.
3 Switch the playback mode
8 Audio channel indicator
Shows the current audio channel type, such
as “Mch” (Multi-channel).
4 Skip forward or backward
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the
start of the current chapter. Touching it again
will skip to the previous chapter.
p You can also perform these operations
by using the TRK (c/d) button.
5 Playback and Pause
9 Play mode indicator
Shows the current play mode.
a Mixing condition indicator
Shows the current mixing condition.
121
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
20
Playing a DVD-VR disc
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
6 Switch the display
Touching [Disp] changes the information as
follows:
Disc information display — Repeat range dis-
play
Searching for a specific scene
and starting playback from a
specified time
You can search for the scene you want by spe-
cifying a title or a chapter, and the time.
p Chapter search and time search are not
possible when disc playback has been
stopped.
7 Hide the touch panel keys
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display
the touch panel keys again.
8 Display the title list
Displays the title list recorded on the disc.
9 Switch next page of touch panel keys
a Stop playback
1
Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]
b Change audio tracks (Multi-audio)
Each touch of [Audio] switches between
audio tracks.
(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time).
p Display indications such as MPEG-A
and Mch indicate the audio system re-
corded on the DVD. Depending on the
setting, playback may not use the same
audio system as that indicated.
c Skip the title forward or backward
Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title.
Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous
title.
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-
ber or time and then touch [Enter].
For titles, chapters
d Change the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the
subtitle languages.
!
!
To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.
To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in
order.
e Fast reverse or forward
Touch [m] or [n] to perform fast reverse or
forward.
For time (time search)
!
!
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],
[min], [0], [3] and [Enter] in order.
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [min], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.
To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch
[1], [0], [0], [5], [s] and [Enter] in order.
If you touch and hold [m] or [n] for five
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues
even if you release either of these keys. To re-
sume playback at a desired point, touch
[f], [m] or [n] opposite to key pushed
for five seconds.
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].
To cancel the input numbers, touch and
hold [Clear].
f Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion
playback)
g Searching for a desired scene and starting
playback from a specified time
122
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Playing a DVD-VR disc
Switch the playback mode
You have two methods for playing DVD-VR
discs; Original (original) and Playlist (play-
list).
20
p Touching or switches the selection to
the next or previous page in the list.
3
To return to the previous screen, touch
[List].
p Titles created with DVD recorders are
called original. Those based on original, re-
arranged titles are called playlist. Playlists
are created on DVD-R/-RW discs.
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time
during playback.
%
Touch [Mode Change] to switch the
play mode.
%
Touch [r] during playback.
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead
If the play mode is changed, playback starts
from the beginning of the selected play mode.
one frame.
To return to normal playback, touch [f].
p With some discs, images may be unclear
during frame-by-frame playback.
Using the short-time skip function
This function enables you to skip over your
specified interval on the video playback. This
is useful to skip commercials on your recorded
DVD-VR disc.
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
%
To skip progressively backward or for-
1
Touch and hold [r] until
played during playback.
The icon is displayed, and forward slow
is dis-
ward, touch [c CM Skip] or [CM Skip d].
Each touch of [c CM Skip] or [CM Skip d]
changes steps in the following order:
c CM Skip
motion playback begins.
p To return to normal playback, touch [f].
5 sec. — 15 sec. — 30 sec. — 1 min. — 2 min.
— 3 min. — 0 sec.
CM Skip d
30 sec. — 1 min. — 1.5 min. — 2 min. — 3 min.
— 5 min. — 10 min. — 0 sec.
2
Touch [q] or [r] to adjust playback
speed during slow motion playback.
Each time you touch [q] or [r] it changes
the speed in four steps in the following order:
1/16 f 1/8 f 1/4 f 1/2
p There is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
p With some discs, images may be unclear
during slow motion playback.
p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
Playing by selecting from the
title list
You can select and play the title you want from
the list.
1
2
Touch [List] on the playback screen.
Touch the title to play from the list.
Using the “Function” menu
1
Touch [Disc] on the “AV Source” menu
to display the “DVD-VR” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
2
Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
123
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
20
Playing a DVD-VR disc
3
Touch
.
Function menu
1
2
3
1 Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
!
!
Title — Repeats just the current title
Chapter — Repeats just the current
chapter
!
Disc — Plays throughout the current
disc
p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast
forward/rewind or slow motion playback,
the repeat play range changes to [Disc].
p This function is not available when disc
playback has been stopped.
2 Selecting audio output
When playing DVDs that both channels are
recorded in monaural, you can switch the
audio output. Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly
until the desired audio output appears in
the display.
!
!
!
!
L+R — Left and right
L — Left
R — Right
Mix — Mixing left and right
p This function is not available when disc
playback has been stopped.
3 DVD setup adjustments
124
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Playing a DivX video
21
You can play a DivX disc using the built-in
drive of the navigation system. This section de-
scribes that operations.
Using the touch panel keys
Playback screen (page1)
1
Reading the screen
1
2
3
4
56
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Playback screen (page2)
1
7
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Folder number indicator
Shows the folder number currently playing.
3 File number indicator
Shows the file number currently playing.
4 Digital sound format indicator
Shows the digital sound format (surround
sound format) currently selected.
5 Play time indicator
8
9
a
a
b
c
d
5
6
e
8
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-
played, meaning that the operation is not
valid.
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current
file.
1 Display the “Function” menu
2 Switch the media file type played
When playing a disc containing a mixture of
various media file types, you can switch be-
tween media files types to play.
6 Current time
7 Audio track indicator
Shows the audio track number currently se-
lected.
8 Audio channel indicator
Shows the current audio channel type, such
as “Mch” (Multi-channel).
Touch [Media] repeatedly to switch between
the following media file types:
9 Subtitle number indicator
Shows the subtitle number currently selected.
a Repeat range indicator
Shows which repeat range has been
selected.
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) — ROM (com-
pressed audio file) — DivX (DivX video files)
p This touch panel key appears only when
playing a disc containing a mixture of
various media file types.
3 Skip forward or backward
125
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
21
Playing a DivX video
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of
the current file. Touching again will skip to the
previous file.
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time
during playback.
p You can also perform these operations
by using the TRK (c/d) button.
4 Playback and Pause
%
Touch [r] during playback.
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead
one frame.
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
5 Switch the information
To return to normal playback, touch [f].
p With some discs, images may be unclear
during frame-by-frame playback.
Touching [Disp] changes the content of the in-
formation panel as follows:
Disc information display — Current folder dis-
play — File name display
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
6 Hide the touch panel keys
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display
the touch panel keys again.
%
Touch and hold [r] until
played during playback.
The icon is displayed, and forward slow
is dis-
motion playback begins.
7 Display the title list
p To return to normal playback, touch [n]
Displays the title list recorded on the disc.
8 Switch next page of touch panel keys
9 Stop playback
a Change audio tracks (Multi-audio)
Each touch of [Audio] switches between
audio tracks.
b Change the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the
subtitle languages.
or [m], etc.
p There is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
p With some discs, images may be unclear
during slow motion playback.
p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
c Fast reverse or forward
Searching for a specific scene
and starting playback from a
specified time
You can search for a desired scene by specify-
ing the time.
Touch [m] or [n] to perform fast reverse or
forward.
If you touch and hold [m] or [n] for five
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues
even if you release either of these keys. To re-
sume playback at a desired point, touch
[f], [m] or [n] opposite to key pushed
for five seconds.
p Time search are not possible when disc
playback has been stopped.
1
Touch [Search].
d Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion
playback)
e Searching for a desired scene and starting
playback from a specified time
126
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Playing a DivX video
21
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-
3
Touch
.
ber or time and then touch [Enter].
For time (time search)
Function menu
!
!
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],
[min], [0], [3] and [Enter] in order.
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [min], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.
To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch
[1], [0], [0], [5], [s] and [Enter] in order.
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].
To cancel the input numbers, touch and
hold [Clear].
1
2
1 Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
Playing by selecting from the
title list
You can select and play the title you want from
the list.
!
!
!
File — Repeat just the current file
Folder — Repeat just the current folder
Disc — Plays throughout the current
disc
1
Touch [List] on the playback screen.
p If you select another folder during repeat
play, the repeat play range changes to
[Disc].
p If you perform fast forward/rewind dur-
ing [File], the repeat play range changes
to [Folder].
The contents of the folder in which the cur-
rently playing file is located are displayed.
2
Touch the title to play from the list.
p When [Folder] is selected, it is not pos-
sible to play back a subfolder of that
folder.
p When playing discs with compressed
audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-
peat play is performed within DivX vi-
deos even if [Disc] is selected.
2 DVD setup adjustments
p Touching or switches the selection to
the next or previous page in the list.
3
To return to the previous screen, touch
[List].
Using the “Function” menu
1
Touch [Disc] on the “AV Source” menu
to display the “DivX” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
2
Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
127
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
22
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup
Configure the DVD-Video/DVD-VR/DivX player.
3
Touch the desired language.
When you select [Others], a language code
input display is shown. Input the four digit
code of the desired language then touch
[Enter].
Displaying DVD/DivX® Setup
menu
1
Play the disc that contains DVD-Video,
DVD-VR or DivX.
p If the selected language is not recorded on
the disc, the default language specified on
the disc is output and displayed.
p You can also switch the subtitle and audio
language by touching [S.Title] or [Audio]
during playback.
2
Touch [Disc] on the “AV Source” menu
to display the normal playback screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
p Even if you use [S.Title] or [Audio] to
switch the subtitle or audio language, this
does not affect the settings here.
3
Touch
.
The “Function” menu appears.
4
Touch [DVD/DivX® Setup].
The “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen appears.
Setting the angle icon display
You can set the angle icon
to display in
scenes where the angle can be switched.
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.
2
Touch [Multi Angle].
Touching [Multi Angle] switches between
5
Touch the desired function.
[On] and [Off].
Setting the top-priority
languages
You can assign the top-priority language to the
top-priority subtitle, audio and menu in initial
playback. If the selected language is recorded
on the disc, subtitles, audio and menu are dis-
played or output in that language.
Setting the aspect ratio
There are two kinds of displays. A wide screen
display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)
of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect
of 4:3. If you use a regular rear display with a
TV aspect of 4:3, you can set the aspect ratio
suitable for your rear display. (We recommend
use of this function only when you want to fit it
to the rear display.)
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.
p When using a regular display, select either
“Letter Box” or “Panscan”. Selecting
“16:9” may result in an unnatural picture.
2
Touch [Subtitle Language], [Audio Lan-
guage] or [Menu Language].
Each language menu is displayed and the cur-
rently set language is selected.
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.
128
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup
22
2
Touch [TV Aspect].
4
While the input number is displayed,
Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the setting
as follows:
touch [Enter].
The code number is registered, and you can
now set the level.
!
16:9 — Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-
played as it is (initial setting)
5
Touch any of [1] to [8] to select the de-
!
Letter Box — The picture is in the shape of
a letter box with black bands at the top and
bottom of the screen
Panscan — The picture is cut short at the
right and left of the screen
sired level.
The parental lock level is set.
!
Level 8 — Playback of the entire disc is
possible (initial setting)
!
!
Level 7 to Level 2 — Playback of discs for
children and non-adult oriented discs is
possible
Level 1 — Only playback of discs for chil-
dren is possible
p When playing discs that do not have a pan-
scan system, the disc is played back with
[Letter Box] even if you select [Panscan]
setting. Confirm whether the disc package
!
bears the
mark.
p If you want to change the parental level al-
ready set, enter the registered code number
and then select the parental level.
p Some discs do not enable changing of the
TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc’s in-
structions.
p We recommend that you keep a record of
your code number in case you forget it.
p The parental lock level is recorded on the
disc. You can confirm it by looking at the
disc package, the included literature or the
disc itself. You cannot use parental lock
with discs that do not feature a recorded
parental lock level.
p With some discs, parental lock operates to
skip certain scenes only, after which normal
playback resumes. For details, refer to the
disc’s instructions.
Setting the parental lock
Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental
lock to set restrictions so that children cannot
watch violent or adult-oriented scenes. You
can set the parental lock level in steps as de-
sired.
p When you set a parental lock level and then
play a disc featuring parental lock, code
number input indications may be dis-
played. In this case, playback will begin
when the correct code number is input.
p If you forget the registered code number,
touch
10 times on the number input
screen. The registered code number is can-
celed, letting you register a new one.
Setting the code number and level
When you first use this function, register your
code number. If you do not register a code
number, parental lock will not operate.
Setting “Auto Play”
When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted,
this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati-
cally and start playback from the first chapter
of the first title.
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.
p This function is available for DVD-Video.
p Some DVDs may not operate properly. If
this function is not fully operable, turn this
function off and start playback.
2
3
Touch [Parental Level].
Touch [0] to [9] to input a four digit
code number.
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.
129
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
22
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup
2
Touch [Auto Play].
Touching [Auto Play] switches this setting be-
tween [On] and [Off].
p When [Auto Play] is set to [On], the repeat
range is automatically set to [Disc].
Setting the subtitle file for
DivX
You can select whether to display DivX exter-
nal subtitles or not.
p If no DivX external subtitle files exist, the
original DivX subtitles are displayed even
when [Custom] is selected.
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.
2
Touch [Subtitle File].
Touching [Subtitle File] switches this setting
between [Original] and [Custom].
p Up to 42 characters can be displayed on
one line. If more than 42 characters are set,
the line breaks and the characters are dis-
played on the next line.
p Up to 126 characters can be displayed on
one screen. If more than 126 characters are
set, the excess characters will not be dis-
played.
p The DivX subtitles will be displayed even
when the subtitle file setting is on if no cor-
responding subtitle files exist.
p Up to three lines can be displayed at
once.
130
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup
Language code chart for DVDs
22
Language (code), input code
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
Spanish (es), 0519
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Language (code), input code
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Language (code), input code
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Rumanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Korean (ko), 1115
Greek (el), 0512
Sango (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Shinghalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Afar (aa), 0101
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Belorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Czech (cs), 0319
Laotian (lo), 1215
Thai (th), 2008
Lithuanian (lt), 1220
Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tongan (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Welsh (cy), 0325
Danish (da), 0401
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Fiji (fj), 0610
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
Nepali (ne), 1405
Norwegian (no), 1415
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Irish (ga), 0701
Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Polish (pl), 1612
131
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
23
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
You can play the compressed audio files
stored in the external storage device (USB,
SD).
refer to the manual supplied with USB sto-
rage device.
1 Source icon
p In the following description, the SD mem-
ory card and USB memory device are col-
lectively referred to as the “external storage
device (USB, SD)”. If it indicates the USB
memory device only, it is referred to as the
“USB storage device”.
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Folder number indicator
3 Current folder name indicator
Shows the folder name currently playing.
4 File number indicator
5 Playback condition indicator
The marks shown below appears and indi-
cates the current playback condition.
: Scan play
Starting procedure
: Random play
: Repeat play
1
Insert the SD memory card into the SD
card slot or plug the USB storage device
into the USB connector.
Indicator
Meaning
All audio files in the current
external storage device
(USB, SD) are played repeat-
edly. This is the default con-
dition.
Media Repeat
2
Touch [USB] or [SD] on the “AV Source”
All audio files in the current
folder are played repeatedly.
menu to display the “USB” or “SD” screen.
p Playback is performed in order of folder
number. Folders are skipped if they con-
tains no playable files. (If there are no play-
able files in folder 01 (root folder), playback
starts from folder 02.)
Folder Repeat
Track Repeat
The current file is played re-
peatedly.
All audio files in the current
external storage device
(USB, SD) are played in ran-
dom order.
Media Random
All audio files in the current
folder are played in random
order.
Reading the screen
Folder Random
Media Scan
1
2 3 4 5 6
7
8
The beginning of the first
audio files of each folder is
played for about 10 seconds.
9
The beginning of each track
in the current folder is
played for about 10 seconds.
Folder Scan
a
b
c
6 File type indicator
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.
7 Play time indicator
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-
mance with some external storage devices.
p You can playback the files on a USB sto-
rage device compliant with Mass Storage
Class. For details about the USB Class,
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current track.
8 Current time
132
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
23
9 Current file number and total number of
files
Shows the file number currently played and
the total number of playable audio files.
a Track title indicator
3 Skip forward or backward
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of
the current file. Touching again will skip to the
previous file.
Shows the title of the track currently playing
(when available).
p If the title of a track is not available, the
file name appears.
Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind
or fast forward.
p There is no sound on fast reverse or for-
ward.
b Artist name indicator*
Shows the artist name currently playing
(when available).
c Album title indicator*
p You can also perform these operations
by using the TRK (c/d) button.
4 Playback and Pause
Shows the title of the album for the current
track (when available).
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
p The information marked with an asterisk (*)
is displayed only when the information has
been encoded on the compressed audio
files. If specific information has not been
encoded on the files, “—” is displayed in-
stead.
Selecting a track from the list
The list lets you see the list of track titles or
folder names on an external storage device
(USB, SD). Touch a folder on the list to view its
contents. Touch a track on the list to play that
track.
Using the touch panel keys
(Music)
1
Touch [List].
The contents of the folder in which the cur-
rently playing file is located are displayed.
#
1
Touch and hold [List].
The contents of the root folder are displayed.
2
2
Touch the folder that you want to view.
3
4
1 Display the “Function” menu
2 Switch the operation screen
Touching this key switches between the
screen to operate music files and the screen
to operate video files. This touch panel key is
available only when there are both audio and
video files in the external storage device (USB,
SD).
The track currently playing is highlighted.
Touching or switches the selection to the
next or previous page in the list.
Touching
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder
is listed, cannot be used.
displays the content of the upper
133
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
23
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds
3
Touch the track you want to play.
of each track. Scan play is performed in the
current repeat play range.
p To cancel the list screen, touch [Detail].
Touching [Scan] switches between [On]
and [Off]. When you find the track you
want, touch [Scan] to turn scan play off.
p After all tracks or folders scanning are
finished, normal playback will begin
again.
p If you turn [Scan] to [On] while the re-
peat play range is set to [Track], the re-
peat play range changes to [Folder]
automatically.
Using the “Function” menu
1
Touch [USB] or [SD] on the “AV Source”
menu to display the “USB” or “SD” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
2
Touch
.
1
2
3
1 Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
!
Media — Repeat all compressed audio
files in the selected external storage de-
vice (USB, SD)
!
!
Track — Repeat just the current track
Folder — Repeat the current folder
p If you skip the file forward or backward
when the repeat play range in “Track”,
the repeat play range changes to
“Folder”.
2 Play tracks in a random order
Random play lets you playback tracks in
random order within the current repeat
range.
Touching [Random] switches between [On]
and [Off].
p If you turn [Random] to [On] while the
repeat play range is set to [Track], the re-
peat play range changes to [Folder]
automatically.
3 Scan folders and tracks
134
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Playing video files (from USB or SD)
24
You can play the video files stored in the exter-
nal storage device (USB, SD).
refer to the manual supplied with USB sto-
rage device.
p In the following description, the SD mem-
ory card and USB memory device are col-
lectively referred to as the “external storage
device (USB, SD)”. If it indicates the USB
memory device only, it is referred to as the
“USB storage device”.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Folder number indicator
3 Current folder name indicator
Shows the folder name currently playing.
4 File number indicator
5 File type indicator
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.
6 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current track.
7 Current time
Starting procedure
1
Insert the SD memory card into the SD
card slot or plug the USB storage device
into the USB connector.
Using the touch panel keys
(Video)
1
2
Touch [USB] or [SD] on the “AV Source”
menu to display each operation screen.
p Playback is performed in order of folder
number. Folders are skipped if they con-
tains no playable files. (If there are no play-
able files in folder 01 (root folder), playback
starts from folder 02.)
2
3
4
5
6
Reading the screen
7
8
1 Display the “Function” menu
1
2 3 4
5
6
7
2 Switch the operation screen
Touching this key switches between the
screen to operate music files and the screen
to operate video files. This touch panel key is
available only when there are both audio and
video files in the external storage device (USB,
SD).
3 Searching for a desired scene and starting
playback from a specified time
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-
mance with some external storage devices.
p You can playback the files on a USB sto-
rage device compliant with Mass Storage
Class. For details about the USB Class,
4 Skip forward or backward
135
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
24
Playing video files (from USB or SD)
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of
the current file. Touching again will skip to the
previous file.
Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind
or fast forward.
3
To return to the previous screen, touch
[Detail].
Searching for a specific scene
and starting playback from a
specified time
You can search for a desired scene by specify-
ing the time.
p There is no sound on fast reverse or for-
ward.
p You can also perform these operations
by using the TRK (c/d) button.
5 Playback and Pause
1
Touch [Search].
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
6 Hide the touch panel keys
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display
the touch panel keys again.
7 Stop playback
8 Display the title list
Displays the title list recorded on the external
storage device (USB, SD).
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-
ber or time and then touch [Enter].
!
!
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],
[min], [0], [3] and [Enter] in order.
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [min], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.
To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch
[1], [0], [0], [5], [s] and [Enter] in order.
Playing by selecting from the
title list
You can select and play the title you want from
the list.
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].
To cancel the input numbers, touch and
hold [Clear].
1
Touch [List] on the playback screen.
The contents of the folder in which the cur-
rently playing file is located are displayed.
#
Touch and hold [List].
The contents of the root folder are displayed.
2
Touch the title to play from the list.
p Touching or switches the selection to
the next or previous page in the list.
136
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Playing video files (from USB or SD)
24
Using the “Function” menu
1
Touch [USB] or [SD] on the “AV Source”
menu to display the “USB” or “SD” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
2
Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
3
Touch
.
p If the touch panel keys are not shown,
touch anywhere on the screen to display
them.
1
2
1 Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
!
Media — Repeat all video files in the se-
lected external storage device (USB, SD)
File — Repeat just the current file
!
!
Folder — Repeat the current folder
p If you skip the file forward or backward
when the repeat play range in “File”, the
repeat play range changes to “Folder”.
2 Changing the screen size of video
If a video file is played, you can select the
display mode between normal and full
screen.
Each touch of [Video Output Setting]
changes the setting as follows:
!
Normal — Video files appear in normal
size.
!
Full — Video files appear in a full-
screen.
137
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
25
Using an iPod (iPod)
1 Source icon
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-
tion system.
p A USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU50V)
(sold separately) is required for connection.
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Chapter number indicator
Shows the current chapter number and total
number of chapters when the file with chap-
ters played.
3 Song number indicator
Shows the number of the song currently play-
ing and total number of songs in the selected
list.
Starting procedure
%
Connect your iPod.
The source changes and then playback will
start.
4 Shuffle play indicator
Appears when shuffle play is activated.
5 Repeat play indicator
Appears when repeat play is activated.
: All-tracks repeat
: One-track repeat
p If the iPod is already connected, touch
[iPod] on the “AV Source” menu.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
p No video output if iPod is selected as AV
source, check the setting in “AV1 Input” on
the “AV System Settings” menu.
6 Current time
7 Album artwork
Album art of the current song is displayed if it
is available.
8 Song title (episode) indicator
Shows the title of the current song. When a
podcast is played, the episode is displayed.
9 Artist name (podcast title) indicator
Shows the artist name currently playing.
When a podcast is played, the podcast title is
displayed.
Reading the screen
Music
a Album title (release date) indicator
Shows the title of the album for the song.
When a podcast is played, the release date is
displayed.
1
2 3 45
6
b Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current song.
p If characters recorded on the iPod are not
compatible with this navigation system,
they may turn into garbled characters.
7
8
9
a
b
Video
1
6
2
138
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using an iPod (iPod)
25
of the current song. Touching again will skip
to the previous song. When the track with
chapters played, chapter can be skipped back
and forward.
Using the touch panel keys
(Music)
2
3
Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind
or fast forward.
4
p You can also perform these operations
by using the TRK (c/d) button.
7 Playback and Pause
5
6
1
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
8 Shuffle All
7
8
All songs (except for the track in “Audio-
books” and “Podcasts”) in your iPod can be
played randomly.
p To cancel the random play, switch
[Shuffle] on the “Function” menu to the
“Off”.
1 Album artwork
Touch the key to enlarge the album artwork. If
you touch again, the artwork returns to its nor-
mal size.
2 Category tabs
Shows the list to narrow down the songs. If
you want to use the list of “Audiobooks”,
“Composers” or “Songs”, touch [MENU] to
display the lists.
Browsing for a song
Touch an item on list to search for a song and
3 Display the “Function” menu
4 Switch the operation screen
Touching this key switches between the
screen to operate music files and the screen
to operate video files. After you touch the key,
the top category menu appears to let you se-
lect the item for playback.
play it on your iPod.
Narrowing down listed songs
1
Touch your desired category tab to dis-
play the song or track list.
!
!
!
!
!
Playlists (playlists)
Genres (genres)
Artists (artists)
Albums (albums)
Podcasts (podcasts)
p This touch panel key is available only
when there are both audio and video file
in your iPod.
The search screen is displayed.
p If iPod fifth generation is connected, the
following settings are automatically
changed when the operation screen is
switched to the screen to operate video
files.
!
[Repeat] is set to [All].
[Shuffle] is set to [Off].
!
5 Display the top category menu
Touching the key displays the top category be-
fore you use the category tabs. If you select
the song using the category tabs to play,
touching the key displays the previous list.
6 Skip back or forward to another song
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
song. Touching [o] once skips to the start
2
Touching or switches the selection
to the next or previous page in the list.
3
Touch the item that you want to refine.
Refine the item until the track title is displayed
on the list.
139
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
25
Using an iPod (iPod)
p Touching [All] on the list includes all op-
tions in the current list. For example, if you
touch [All] after touching [Artists], you can
proceed to the next screen with all artists in
the list selected.
4
Touch the character key to display the
page which includes applicable options.
5
On the song (or episode) list, touch the
track you want to play.
p After you select Artists, Albums, or
Genres, go on to touch one of the list to
start playing the first songs in the selected
list and display the next options.
Touch and hold the item that you want to re-
fine.
Operating this navigation
system's iPod function
from your iPod
This navigation system’s iPod function can be
operated from your iPod. Sound can be heard
from the car’s speakers, and operation can be
conducted from your iPod.
This function can be operated with the follow-
ing iPod models:
Even if [Change Control Mode] is set to
[iPod], following functions are available from
this navigation system.
#
Plays back the files related to the touched item.
4
On the song (or episode) list, touch the
track you want to play.
p After you select the track using this func-
tion, touching [MENU] displays the list pre-
viously selected.
Searching for applicable items
alphabetically
Using the search control displays the page
which includes the first applicable option.
p This function is available for the alphabeti-
cal list only.
!
!
!
!
Playback and Pause
Fast reverse or forward
Skip forward or backward
Adjusting the volume
Starting the video playback
This navigation system can play video if an
iPod with video capabilities is connected.
1
Touch [Video].
2
Touch one of the categories in that con-
tains the video you want to play.
Search control
1
Touch your desired category tab to dis-
play the list.
2
3
Touch the item that you want to refine.
Touch [c] or [d] to select the character.
p An article listed below and space at the be-
ginning of the artist name will be ignored
and the next character will be taken into ac-
count for searching.
Video playback will start.
3
Touch your desired item on the list to
— “A” or “a”
— “AN”, “An”, or “an”
— “THE”, “The”, or “the”
narrow down them until the video list ap-
pears.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
140
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using an iPod (iPod)
25
If you touch and hold [o] or [p] for five
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues
even if you release either of these keys. To re-
sume playback at a desired point, touch
[f], [o] or [p].
4
On the video list, touch the video you
want to play.
5
Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
= For more details of the operation, refer to
p You can also perform these operations
by using the TRK (c/d) button.
5 Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
6 Display the top category menu for video
Touching the key displays the top category for
video playback.
Using the touch panel keys
(Video)
1
7 Hide the touch panel keys
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display
the touch panel keys again.
2
3
4
Browsing for a video
Touching the item on list allows you to search
for a video and play it in your iPod.
5
6
7
1 Display the “Function” menu
2 Switch the operation screen
Touching this key switches between the
screen to operate music files and the screen
to operate video files. After you touch the key,
the top category menu appears to let you se-
lect the item for playback.
Narrowing down a video with the list
1
Touch [MENU] or [Top Menu].
The search screen is displayed.
p This touch panel key is available only
when there are both audio and video file
in your iPod.
3 Display the previous selected list
If you select the video from the list to play
after touching Top Menu, touching the key
displays the previous list.
2
3
Touch the category you want.
Touching or switches the selection
4 Skip back or forward to another song
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
video. Touching [o] once skips to the start
of the current video. Touching again will skip
to the previous video. When the video with
chapters played, chapter can be skipped back
and forward.
to the next or previous page in the list.
4
Touch the item that you want to refine.
Refine the item until the track title is displayed
on the list.
5
On the video list, touch the video you
want to play.
Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind
or fast forward.
p After you select the video using this func-
tion, touching [MENU] displays the list pre-
viously selected.
141
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
25
Using an iPod (iPod)
2
Touch
.
Searching for applicable items
alphabetically
1
2
3
4
Using the search control displays the page
which includes the first applicable option.
p This function is available for the alphabeti-
cal list only.
5
6
1 Setting repeat play
There are two repeat play types for play-
back.
Search control
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
1
2
3
Touch the category you want.
!
!
One — Repeats just the current track
All — Repeats all tracks in the selected
list
Touch the item that you want to refine.
Touch [c] or [d] to select the character.
p An article listed below and space at the be-
ginning of the artist name will be ignored
and the next character will be taken into ac-
count for searching.
2 Setting the shuffle play for music
This function shuffles songs or albums and
plays them in random order.
Each touch of [Shuffle] changes the setting
as follows:
— “A” or “a”
— “AN”, “An”, or “an”
— “THE”, “The”, or “the”
!
!
Off — Does not shuffle.
Songs — Plays back songs in random
order within the selected list
Albums — Selects an album randomly,
and then plays back all songs in that
album in order
4
Touch the character key to display the
page which includes applicable options.
!
5
On the video list, touch the video you
3 Setting the audiobook play speed
While listening to an audiobook on iPod,
playback speed can be changed.
Each touch of [Audio Book] changes the
setting as follows:
want to play.
Using the “Function” menu
p If [Change Control Mode] is set to [iPod],
only the setting of [Change Control Mode]
is available.
!
!
Normal — Playback in normal speed
Faster — Playback faster than normal
speed
!
Slower — Playback slower than normal
speed
1
Touch [iPod] on the “AV Source” menu
to display the control screen for “iPod”.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
4 Playback video in wide screen mode
If the video is compatible with wide screen
format, set [Widescreen] to [On] in order to
view the video image in the wide screen.
Each touch of [Widescreen] changes the
setting as follows:
142
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using an iPod (iPod)
25
!
!
On — Outputs the wide-screen video
from iPod
Off — Outputs the normal-sized video
from iPod
p Display size is changed after you
change “Widescreen” setting and select
the video to play.
p This setting is available only during the
video operation.
5 Setting iPod control mode
While the control mode is set to iPod, you
can operate iPod function from the con-
nected iPod.
Each touch of [Change Control Mode]
changes the setting as follows:
!
Navi — This navigation system’s iPod
function can be operated from this navi-
gation system.
!
iPod — This navigation system’s iPod
function can be operated from the con-
nected iPod.
6 Playing songs related to the currently
playing song
Songs related to the currently playing song
are played. You can play songs of the follow-
ing lists.
!
!
!
Artist list of currently playing genre
Album list of currently playing artist
Song list of currently playing album
p This setting is available only during the
music operation.
p Depending on the number of files in the
iPod, there may be a delay when display-
ing a list.
!
!
!
Link Artists — Songs related to the cur-
rently playing artist will be played.
Link Albums — Songs related to the
currently playing album will be played.
Link Genre — Songs related to the cur-
rently playing genre will be played.
143
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
26
Using the Bluetooth audio player
You can control the Bluetooth audio player
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology.
p Before using the Bluetooth audio player,
you need to register and connect the device
to this navigation system.
%
Touch [Bluetooth Audio] on the “AV
Source” menu to display the
“Bluetooth Audio” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
= For more details of the operation, refer
to Chapter 11.
p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player
connected to this navigation system, the
available operations with this navigation
system are limited to the following two le-
vels:
Reading the screen
1
2
3
4
— A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribu-
tion Profile): Only playing back songs on
your audio player is possible.
— AVRCP profile (Audio/Video Remote
Control Profile): Playing back, pausing,
selecting songs, etc., are possible.
p Since there are a number of Bluetooth
audio players available on the market, op-
erations with your Bluetooth audio player
using this navigation system vary greatly in
range. Please refer to the instruction man-
ual that came with your Bluetooth audio
player as well as this manual while operat-
ing your player on this navigation system.
p While you are listening to songs on your
Bluetooth audio player, please refrain from
operating your cellular phone as much as
possible. If you try operating on your cellu-
lar phone, the signal from your cellular
phone may cause a noise on the song play-
back.
p Even if you switch to another source while
listening to a song on your Bluetooth audio
player, the playback of song continues to
elapse.
p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player
you connected to this navigation system,
operations on this navigation system to
control the player may differ from those ex-
plained in this manual.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Device name
3 Bluetooth connection status indicator
4 Current time
If the connected Bluetooth audio player fea-
tures AVRCP 1.3, the following items will be
displayed.
!
!
Track number indicator
Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current track.
Track title indicator
Shows the title of the track currently play-
ing (when available).
Artist name indicator
Shows the artist name currently playing
(when available).
Album title indicator
Shows the title of the album for the current
track (when available).
Playback condition indicator
The marks shown below appears and indi-
cates the current playback condition (when
available).
!
!
!
!
p When you are talking on a cellular phone
connected to this unit via Bluetooth wire-
less technology, song playback from your
Bluetooth audio player connected to this
unit is paused.
: Random play
: Repeat play
144
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the Bluetooth audio player
26
Using the “Function” menu
Indicator
Meaning
p This menu is available only when the con-
nected Bluetooth audio player features
AVRCP 1.3.
All Repeat
All audio files in the current
Bluetooth audio player are
played repeatedly. This is the
default condition.
All Repeat Ran-
dom
1
Touch [Bluetooth Audio] on the “AV
Track Repeat
Source” menu to display the
“Bluetooth Audio” screen.
The current file is played re-
peatedly.
Track Repeat
Random
= For details concerning operations, refer to
All audio files in the current
Bluetooth audio player are
played in random order.
Random
2
Touch
.
p In the following cases, track information
will only be displayed after a track starts or
resumes playing:
— You connect the Bluetooth audio player
compatible with AVRCP1.3, and operate
the player to start playing.
— You select another track when playback
is paused.
1
2
1 Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
Using the touch panel keys
!
All — Repeats all compressed audio
files in the Bluetooth audio player
Track — Repeats just the current track
Off — Does not repeat.
1
!
!
p If you skip the file forward or backward
when the repeat play range in “Track”,
the repeat play range changes to “All”.
2 Play tracks in a random order
Random play lets you playback tracks in
random order within the current repeat
range.
2
3
Touching [Random] switches between “On”
and “Off”.
1 Display the “Function” menu
2 Playback and Pause
Touching [d] or [e] switches between play-
back and pause.
3 Connect the Bluetooth audio player
Touching [Connect] connects the Bluetooth
audio player manually.
145
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
27
Using the XM tuner
You can use the navigation system to control
an XM satellite digital tuner, which is sold se-
parately.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
XM tuner’s operation manuals. This section
provides information on XM operations with
the navigation system which differs from that
described in the XM tuner’s operation man-
ual.
About the logo for channel name
Only the logo data that is contained in the na-
vigation system can be displayed for each
channel. The logo of a newly established chan-
nel that is not contained cannot be displayed.
When no logo may be displayed, the following
substitute icon is displayed.
Substitute icon
The following XM satellite digital tuner units
cannot be connected:
GEX-P900XM, GEX-P910XM
p The icon of each broadcast station is con-
tained in the NAND flash memory based
on the data provided by XM Satellite Radio
as of March 2009.
p Any changes made by XM Satellite Radio
in the lineup or icon of the broadcast sta-
tion in the future may not be supported by
the navigation system, and may cause the
unit to display incorrect icons.
Reading the screen
ALL CH MODE
1
2
3
4
56
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 XM band indicator
Shows the XM band that has been selected.
3 Preset number indicator
7
8
Shows what preset item has been selected.
4 XM channel number indicator
Shows the XM channel number the tuner is
currently tuned to.
9
a
CATEGORY MODE
5 XM channel category
Shows the category of broadcast channel.
6 Current time
1
2
3
4
56
7 XM channel select mode indicator
Shows what channel select mode has been
selected. You can select a channel from all
channels in ALL CH MODE, and select a
channel from selected category in
CATEGORY MODE.
7
8
9
a
8 XM station name logo
p The message “ON THE AIR” disappears
if the navigation system cannot receive
XM tuner reception for some reason.
9 XM station name indicator
Shows the XM broadcast station name the
tuner is currently tuned in.
a Detail information
Shows the detailed information of the broad-
cast channel currently being received.
146
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the XM tuner
27
6 Preset key for receiving the traffic
audio service
Using the touch panel keys
%
Touch [XM] on the “AV Source” menu
to display the “XM” screen.
7 Switching the XM channel select mode
You can switch the mode between the two
methods for selecting and listing the chan-
nel.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
ALL CH MODE
1
2
ALL CH MODE:
You can select a channel from all channels
when you operate this function.
CATEGORY MODE:
3
You can select a channel within a selected
category that you operate this function.
8 Selecting an XM channel directly
4
5
9 Switching to the list display
You can select the desired channel from the
list display.
6 7 8 9
CATEGORY MODE
1
2
a Switching the channel category
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired cate-
gory.
a
4
5
Selecting an XM channel directly
You can select an XM channel directly by en-
tering the desired channel number.
6 7 8 9
1
2
Touch [Direct].
1 Memorize the current song
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired
2 Display the “Function” menu
3 Recalling channels from the preset
Touch to recall the preset channel.
4 Perform manual tuning
The channels move up or down one at a
time.
channel number.
To cancel the input numbers, touch
.
3
While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
The XM channel that was entered is selected.
4
Touch
.
You return to the previous display.
p If you keep touching [c] or [d] you can
skip the broadcasting channels.
5 Select an XM band
Displaying the Radio ID
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-
played.
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired
XM band is displayed: XM 1, XM 2 or
XM 3. This is useful for switching the preset
item.
1
Touch [Direct].
147
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
27
Using the XM tuner
2
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].
2
Touch the desired channel that you
If you select another channel, display of the
Radio ID is canceled.
want to listen to.
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six
broadcast channels for later recall (also with
the touch of a key).
Touch or to switch to the next page or pre-
vious page.
p During CATEGORY MODE, touch [c] or
[d] to switch to another category.
1
Select the channel that you want to
store in memory.
2
3
Touch [Preset] to display the preset list.
Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]
to [P6].
Using “My Mix” function
The selected station has been stored in mem-
ory.
The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key [P1] to [P6], the station is recalled from
memory.
p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three XM
bands can be stored in memory.
p You can also touch [c] or [d] to recall sta-
tions assigned to preset tuning keys [P1] to
[P6] in the detailed information display dur-
ing the “ALL CH MODE”.
“My Mix” function memorizes the song title
and artist name of the song currently being re-
ceived. When the song that matches the mem-
orized song title and artist name is being
broadcast on a station other than the one you
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you
can switch the station to listen to that song.
p A track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the
song title and the artist name are memor-
ized.
Memorizing the song
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to can be memorized to “My Mix”.
Selecting a channel from the list
The list content can be switched so you can
search for the track you want to listen to not
only by the channel name but also by the artist
name or song title.
p The channel list shows all channels during
ALL CH MODE, and the channels included
in the selected category during
%
Touch and hold [Memo].
The song title and artist name of current song
you are listening to are memorized, and a con-
firmation message appears.
p The song title and artist name of up to 12
songs can be memorized. Trying to save
more than 12 songs will result in older ones
being overwritten.
p You cannot memorize the song title or the
artist name when “– – – – – – – –” is dis-
played on the title information.
p This function is invalid for the channel
“000”.
p The memorized title may not be displayed
correctly depending on the conditions.
CATEGORY MODE. To switch the channel
mode, touch [Mode].
1
Touch [List].
XM channel list appears in the display.
Each touch of [List] changes the screen as fol-
lows:
Detail information display or Preset list
display — CH Name List (Channel name) —
Song Title List (Song title) —
Artist Name List (Artist name)
148
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the XM tuner
27
p You can customize the setting for the mem-
orized songs later.
Tuning in to the memorized channel
%
Touch [Traffic].
= For more details concerning the opera-
tion, refer to Setting the memorized
p You can also perform this operation by
touching [Traffic] on the “AV Source”
menu.
p You can even call up a “Instant Traffic &
Weather” channel from a source other than
the XM source.
p To cancel the announcement, touch [TRFC
Off] on the screen.
When the memorized song is broadcast
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.
Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen
to that track.
p If the memorized song is not checked or
when [Off] is selected on [Alert] on
“MEMO Edit” screen, no alert will be pro-
vided.
Using the “Function” menu
1
Touch [XM] on the “AV Source” menu
to display the “XM” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
p Notification may not be provided depend-
ing on the status of the Navigation System.
p If there is even a slight difference between
the memorized title and the title of the
song being broadcast, no notification will
be provided even though they are the same
song.
2
Touch
.
Using the direct traffic
announcement function
You can listen to the memorized “Instant Traf-
fic & Weather” channel by directly calling it up
with [Traffic]. (Only one station can be memor-
ized.)
1
1 Setting the memorized songs
Memorizing an “Instant Traffic &
Weather” channel
1
Tune into “Instant Traffic & Weather”
channel.
2
Touch and hold [Traffic] for two sec-
onds or more.
That “Instant Traffic & Weather” channel will
be memorized.
p Even if you use the SiriusConnect universal
tuner together, only one station can be
memorized. The station memorized after-
ward will overwrite the existing one.
149
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
27
Using the XM tuner
Setting the memorized songs
Selecting the songs to alert
The list of song titles memorized for the MyMix
Function (MyMix list) is displayed. You can
change the notification setting when the song
is broadcast again. You can enable or disable
notification for each song.
1
Touch [Memo Edit].
2
Touch the song title that you want to
exclude from the notification list.
The check mark is removed, and the song title
is excluded from the notification list.
Changing the alert setting
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at
the same time. This function is useful when
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without
changing each memorized song.
1
Touch [Memo Edit].
2
Touch [Alert].
Touch to toggle the selection.
Deleting the memorized songs
You can delete each one of the memorized
songs from the song title list.
1
Touch [Memo Edit].
2
Touch and hold the song you want to
delete.
p To delete all songs that are memorized,
touch [Delete All].
3
Touch [Yes].
150
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the SIRIUS tuner
28
3 Preset number indicator
You can use the navigation system to control a
Pioneer Sirius Satellite Radio tuner, which is
sold separately.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
SIRIUS tuner’s operation manuals. This sec-
tion provides information on SIRIUS opera-
tions with navigation system which differs
from that described in the SIRIUS tuner’s op-
eration manual.
p When you use the SiriusConnect universal
tuner (sold separately) with this navigation
system, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE is
required. For details concerning operation,
refer to the owner’s manual of Pioneer SIR-
IUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnect
universal tuner.
Shows what preset item has been selected.
4 SIRIUS channel number indicator
Shows the SIRIUS channel number that the
tuner is tuned to.
5 Current time
6 SIRIUS channel select mode indicator
Shows what channel select mode has been
selected. You can select a channel from all
channels in All Ch Mode, and select a chan-
nel from the selected category in
Category Mode.
7 Variable information area
Shows various information about the broad-
cast channel currently being received.
= For more details about the displayed in-
formation, refer to Switch the SIRIUS
Reading the screen
All Ch Mode
1
2
3
4
5
Using the touch panel keys
%
Touch [SIRIUS] on the “AV Source”
6
7
menu to display the “SIRIUS” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
All Ch Mode
1 2
3
Category Mode
1
2
3
4
5
4
6
7
5
6
7 8 9
a
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 SIRIUS band indicator
Shows the SIRIUS band that has been se-
lected.
151
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
28
Using the SIRIUS tuner
You can select a channel within a selected
category that you operate this function.
9 Select a SIRIUS channel directly
a Switch the SIRIUS display
Each touch of [Disp] changes the display
information.
Channel number — Channel name —
Channel category — Artist name/feature —
Song/program title — Composer
b Switch the channel category
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired cate-
gory.
Category Mode
1 2
3
4
5
6
7 8 9
a
1 Memorize the current song
2 Switch the SIRIUS Instant replay mode
3 Display the “Function” menu
Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly
You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by
entering the desired channel number.
1
Touch [Direct].
4 Recalling channels from the preset
Touch to recall the preset channel.
5 Perform manual tuning
The channels move up or down one at a
time.
2
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired
channel number.
To cancel the input numbers, touch
.
3
While the input number is displayed,
p If you keep touching [c] or [d] you can
skip the broadcasting channels.
6 Select a SIRIUS band
touch [Enter].
The SIRIUS channel that was entered se-
lected.
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired
SIRIUS band is displayed, SIRIUS 1,
SIRIUS 2, or SIRIUS 3. This is useful for
switching the preset.
4
Touch
.
You return to the previous display.
7 Preset key for receiving the traffic
audio service
Display the Radio ID
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-
played.
1
Touch [Direct].
8 Switch the SIRIUS channel select
mode
2
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].
You can switch the mode between the two
methods for selecting and listing the chan-
nel.
If you select another channel, display of the
Radio ID is canceled.
All Ch Mode:
You can select a channel from all channels
when you operate this function.
Category Mode:
152
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the SIRIUS tuner
28
p You cannot memorize a song that does not
have song title and artist name information.
p You cannot memorize the song title or the
artist name of channel “000”.
p The memorized title may not be displayed
correctly.
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys
[Preset 1] to [Preset 6], you can easily store up
to six broadcast stations for later recall (also
with the touch of a key).
1
Select the channel that you want to
When the memorized song is broadcast
store in memory.
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.
Alert message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to
switch to that station, and you can listen to
that track. If you touch [Stay], the cannel does
not switch.
p If the alert for the song is “Off” or set
[Alert] to [Off], no notification will be pro-
vided even when that song is broadcast.
2
3
Touch [Preset] to display the preset list.
Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]
to [P6].
The selected station has been stored in mem-
ory.
The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key [Preset 1] to [Preset 6] the station is re-
called from memory.
p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three SIRIUS
bands can be stored in memory.
p You can also touch [c] or [d] to recall sta-
tions assigned to preset tuning keys
[Preset 1] to [Preset 6] in the detailed infor-
mation display during “All Ch Mode”.
p Notification may not be provided depend-
ing on the situation of the Navigation Sys-
tem.
Using the direct traffic
announcement function
You can listen to a memorized traffic channel
by directly calling it up with the [Traffic] (Only
one station can be memorized).
Using “My Mix” function
The MyMix function memorizes the song title
and artist name of the song currently being re-
ceived. When a track that matches the memor-
ized song title and artist name is being
broadcast on a station other than the one you
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you
can switch the station to listen to that song.
p The track itself is NOT downloaded; only
the song title and the artist name are mem-
orized.
Memorizing an traffic channel
1
Tune in to a traffic channel.
2
Touch and hold [Traffic] for two sec-
onds or more.
The traffic channel will be memorized.
p Even if you use this with the XM satellite di-
gital tuner, only one station can be memor-
ized. The station memorized afterward will
overwrite the existing one.
Memorizing the song
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to can be memorized.
p The channels 000 can not be memorized.
%
Touch and hold [Memo].
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to are memorized, and
[Song and artist have been saved.] is dis-
played.
p Up to 10 song titles and artist names can be
memorized.
Tuning in to the memorized channel
%
Touch [Traffic].
p You can also perform this operation by
touching [Traffic] on the “AV Source”
menu.
153
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
28
Using the SIRIUS tuner
p To cancel a traffic announcement, touch
2
Touch
.
[TRFC Off].
Using the “Instant Replay” function
The “Instant Replay” function allows you to
replay the stored broadcast on Pioneer SIRIUS
BUS INTERFACE (if Pioneer SIRIUS BUS IN-
TERFACE capable for this function). As soon
as you tune to a channel, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS
INTERFACE automatically begins storing the
broadcast. It can store approximately up to 44
minutes previous (depending on the selected
channel and the memory capacity of Pioneer
SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE).
1
2
3
1 Setting the memorized songs
2 Using the Game Alert function
3 Displaying Game Information
1
Touch [Instant Replay] on the SIRIUS
screen to activate the “Instant Replay”
mode.
2
Touch keys for “Instant Replay”.
Setting the memorized songs
Selecting the songs to alert
You can change the setting of the alert when
the track is broadcast again. You can enable
or disable alert for each song.
Return to the start of the current
song or program. Touching again
will skip back to the previous song
or program.
[o]
[o] and hold
Fast reverses.
1
Touch [Memo Edit].
Forwards play to the next song or
program
[p]
2
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the
desired song.
[p] and hold
[f]
Fast-forwards.
Touching [f] switches between
playback and pause.
p During “Instant Replay” mode, each touch
of [Disp] changes the display information
as follows;
Time position — Channel number — Chan-
nel name — Channel category — Artist
name/feature — Song/program title —
Composer
3
Touch [On/Off] to turn the setting on.
p You cannot replay the broadcast prior to the
beginning of stored data.
When the alert for the song is activated, [On]
appears at the beginning of the selected title.
p Touch [On/Off] again to turn the setting off.
Using the “Function” menu
Changing the alert setting
1
Touch [SIRIUS] on the “AV Source”
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at
the same time. This function is useful when
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without
changing each memorized song.
menu to display the “SIRIUS” screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
154
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the SIRIUS tuner
28
When you have already made 12 team se-
lections, “FULL” is displayed and additional
team selection is not possible. In this case,
first delete the team selection and then try
again.
1
2
Touch [Memo Edit].
Touch [Alert].
p Touch to toggle the selection.
Deleting the memorized songs
You can delete each one of the memorized
tracks from the song title list.
Changing the alert setting
You can enable or disable the alert for selected
items. This function is useful when to want to
turn the alert off temporarily without changing
the setting of each selected team.
1
Touch [Memo Edit].
2
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the
song title that you want to delete.
1
2
Touch [Game Alert].
3
Touch [Delete] when the song you
Touch [Alert].
p Touch to toggle the selection.
want to delete is displayed.
A message will appear asking you to confirm
the deletion.
When a game involving one of your
teams is broadcast
4
Touch [Yes].
A message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to
switch the station, and you can view the game
information. If you touch [Stay], the channel
does not switch.
p Alerts may not be provided depending on
the status of the navigation system.
Using the Game Alert function
Selecting teams for Game Alert
This navigation system can alert you when
games involving your favorite sports teams are
about to start. To use this function you need to
store the teams you want to follow in advance.
Displaying Game Information
An alert will be displayed when a game with
the team you selected is about to start (or is
currently under way). You can also display
game information and changes to the broad-
cast channel.
p The Game Information function is available
when [Alert] is [On] in “Game Alert”.
1
Touch [Game Info].
1
2
Touch [Game Alert].
2
Touch [Prev] or [Next] to view the game
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the
score information which is registered.
p The game score will be updated automati-
cally.
league.
3
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the
p Touch [Tune To] to switch to the channel
that broadcasts the displayed game.
p If you have not made any team selections,
“Not Set” is displayed.
p When no games involving your favorite
teams are currently being played
“NO GAME” is displayed.
team.
4
Touch [On/Off].
The team displayed as [On] is the alert target.
p When the selected team is excluded from
the alert target, the team is displayed as
[Off]. Up to 12 teams can be selected.
155
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
29
Using AV input
You can display “video image” output by AV1
Input or AV2 Input to the screen of the navi-
gation system. For details of the connection
method, refer to “Installation Manual”.
Using the touch panel keys
%
Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
CAUTION
For safety reasons, video images cannot be
viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view
video images, you must stop in a safe place and
apply the parking brake.
1
Using AV1
1 Hide the touch panel keys
You can display “video image” output by the
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel
keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to
display the touch panel keys again.
equipment connected to “AV1 Input”.
1
Touch [AV1 Input] on the “AV System
Settings” menu.
2
Touch [AV1] on the “AV Source” menu.
The image is displayed on the screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
Using AV2
You can display “video image” output by the
equipment connected to “AV2 Input”.
1
Touch [AV2 Input] on the “AV System
Settings” menu.
2
Touch [AV2] on the “AV Source” menu.
The image is displayed on the screen.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
156
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)
30
The term “external unit” refers to future
Pioneer devices that are not currently planned
for, or to devices that allow control of basic
functions although they are not fully con-
trolled by the navigation system. Two external
units can be controlled by this navigation sys-
tem. When two external units are connected,
the navigation system allocates them as exter-
nal unit 1 or external unit 2.
1
2
3
4
5
For details of the connection method, refer to
“Installation Manual”.
1 Send a band command
For details concerning operation, refer to the
external unit’s operation manual. This section
provides information on external unit opera-
tions with the navigation system that differ
from those described in the external unit’s op-
eration manual.
p Operation varies depending on the external
unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-
nal unit may not respond.)
Touch to send a band command to the ex-
ternal unit.
p Operation varies depending on the exter-
nal unit connected. (In some cases, the
external unit may not respond.)
2 Send an [a], [b], [c], or [d] command
Touch to operate the external unit.
p Operation varies depending on the exter-
nal unit connected. (In some cases,
some functions may not be used until
you touch and hold the key.)
Reading the screen
3 Switching between automatic and man-
ual function
1
2
3
4
You can turn automatic and manual func-
tion on or off.
You can switch between Auto and Manual
functions of the external unit connected.
Initially, this function is set to Auto.
p Operating commands set for Auto and
Manual operations vary depending on
the external unit connected.
4 Send a 1 key to 6 key command
The external unit can be operated by trans-
mitting the operating commands set to 1
key — 6 key.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 External unit indicator
Displays the information that is sent by con-
nected external units.
3 Auto/Manual mode indicator
Shows the current mode.
p Operation varies depending on the exter-
nal unit connected. (In some cases,
some functions may not be used until
you touch and hold the key.)
5 Use F1 — F4 to operate the external unit
The external unit can be operated by trans-
mitting the operating commands set to F1
— F4.
4 Current time
p The operating commands set to F1 —
F4 vary depending on the external unit.
p Some functions may not be used until
you touch and hold the key.
Using the touch panel keys
%
Touch [EXT1] or [EXT2] on the “AV
Source” menu to select the external unit.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
157
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
31
Other functions
— The “Video image” and sound are output
only when the appropriate setting on
[AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input] are
[Video].
Selecting the video for
“Rear display”
You can choose either to show the same
image as the front screen or to show the se-
lected source on the “Rear display”.
Operating the picture
adjustment
%
menu.
Touch [Rear Screen] on the “AV Source”
Each touch of [Rear Screen] changes the set-
tings as follows:
CAUTION
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these
navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-
tion. To enable these functions, you must stop in
a safe place and apply the parking brake. Refer to
“Important Information for the user” (a separate
manual).
!
Mirror AV — The video on the front screen
of the navigation unit is output to the “Rear
display”
iPod — The video and sound of the iPod
are output to the “Rear display”
Disc — The video and sound of the DVDs
are output to the “Rear display”
AV1 — The video and sound of AV1 are
output to the “Rear display”
!
!
!
!
You can adjust the picture for each source and
rear view camera.
AV2 — The video and sound of AV2 are
output to the “Rear display”
1
Press and hold the MODE button.
Press and hold to display the “Picture Adjust-
p When [Mirror AV] is selected, the following
restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.
— When selecting [Rear View] in the map
display, nothing is displayed.
ment” screen.
— All sounds cannot be output for “Rear
display”.
— When playing back video files on the ex-
ternal storage device (USB, SD), the
“Video image” is not output.
p When Disc is selected, the following restric-
tions are applied to “Rear display”.
— When a CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc is
set in the built-in DVD drive, only the
sounds is output.
p When iPod is selected, the following restric-
tions are applied to “Rear display”.
— The “Video image” and sound are output
only when the appropriate setting on
[AV1 Input] is [iPod].
!
!
!
!
Brightness — Adjusts the black intensity
Contrast — Adjusts the contrast
Color — Adjusts the color saturation
Color Temp. — Adjusts the tone of color
(red is emphasized or green is emphasized)
Dimmer — Adjusts the brightness of dis-
play
!
!
[Camera] — Shows the picture adjustment
display for the rear view camera
p When AV is selected, the following restric-
tions are applied to “Rear display”.
— The “Video image” and sound are output
only when AV1/AV2 has both video and
sound.
p Touching [Source] while adjusting the rear
view camera image returns you to the pre-
vious screen.
158
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Other functions
31
p The adjustments of Brightness and
Contrast are stored separately when your
vehicle’s headlights are off (daytime) and
when your vehicle’s headlights are on
(nighttime). These are switched automati-
cally depending on the vehicle’s headlights
are on or off.
p The adjustments of Dimmer is stored sepa-
rately when your vehicle’s headlights are off
(daytime) and when your vehicle’s head-
lights are on (nighttime). Dimmer is
switched automatically only when the value
of nighttime is lower than the value of day-
time.
p You cannot adjust Color for the source
without a video and navigation map display.
p The setting contents can be memorized se-
parately for the following screen and the
“Video image”.
— AM/FM/CD/ROM/iPod(Music)/SD
(audio)/USB(audio)/Bluetooth Audio/
XM/SIRIUS/Digital Radio screen
— AV1 and iPod(Video)
— DVD-V, DVD-VR, DivX
— SD(Video) and USB(Video)
— AV2 and EXT1, EXT2
— Rear view camera image
— Map screen
p The picture adjustment may not be avail-
able with some rear view cameras.
p Because of the LCD screen characteristics,
you may not be able to adjust the screen at
low temperatures.
2
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the desired
item.
Each time you touch [+] or [–] increases or de-
creases the level of the desired item.
3
Touch
to return to the previous
screen.
159
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
32
Customizing preferences
Setting video input 2 (AV2)
You can switch this setting according to the
connected component.
p This setting applies to RCA inputs
(AUDIO INPUT and VIDEO INPUT) on the
back of the system.
Options on the “AV System
Settings” menu
Displaying the “AV System
Settings” menu
1
Press the HOME button to display the
“Top Menu”.
%
Touch [AV2 Input] on the “AV System
Settings” menu.
2
Touch [Settings].
Each touch of [AV2 Input] changes the set-
ting as follows:
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.
3
Touch [AV Settings].
The “AV System Settings” menu appears.
!
!
Off — No video component is connected
EXT — Pioneer external unit connected
with the RCA video cable
!
Video — External video component
Switching the auto antenna
setting
If the blue lead of the navigation system is
connected to the antenna control terminal of
the vehicle, select either of the following set-
tings.
p You can only adjust [Wide Mode] when se-
lecting an AV source with video.
p You can only adjust [Rear SP] when the AV
source is “Off”.
!
Power — The antenna extends or turns on
when the ignition switch is turned on. The
antenna is stored or turned off when the
ignition switch is turned off.
Setting video input 1 (AV1)
You can switch this setting according to the
connected component.
p This setting applies to mini-jack input.
!
Radio — The antenna extends or turns on
only when the audio source is FM or AM.
The antenna is stored or turned off when
the AV source is switched to another
source.
%
Touch [AV1 Input] on the “AV System
Settings” menu.
Each touch of [AV1 Input] changes the set-
ting as follows:
%
Touch [ANT CTRL] on the “AV System
Settings” menu.
Touching [ANT CTRL] switches between
[Radio] and [Power].
!
iPod — iPod connected with the USB Inter-
face cable for iPod (CD-IU50V)
!
!
Video — External video component
Off — No video component is connected
p Regardless of whether [Radio] or [Power]
is selected, turning off the ignition switch
will cause the antenna to automatically re-
tract or turn off.
p Use AV1 Input when connecting CD-RM10
(sold separately) through the external video
component.
160
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing preferences
32
Changing the wide screen mode
Setting the rear output
The navigation system’s rear output can be
used for a full-range speaker or subwoofer
connection. If you switch Rear SP to Sub. W,
you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to
a subwoofer without using an auxiliary amp.
Initially, the navigation system is set for a rear
full-range speaker connection (Full).
p Both rear speaker leads output and RCA
rear output are switched simultaneously in
this setting. (When you use the product
without RCA rear output, this setting only
applies to the rear speaker leads.)
%
Touch [Wide Mode] on the “AV System
Settings” menu.
Each touch of [Wide Mode] changes the set-
ting as follows:
!
Full (full)
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal
direction only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3
TV picture (normal picture) without any
omissions.
!
Cinema (cinema)
p Rear SP can be set only when the source is
[Off].
A picture is enlarged by the same propor-
tion as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direc-
tion and by an intermediate proportion
between Full and Zoom in the vertical di-
rection; ideal for a cinema-sized picture
(wide screen picture) where captions lie
outside the frame.
1
Touch [Rear SP] on the “AV System Set-
tings” menu.
!
!
Zoom (zoom)
2
Touch [Rear SP] to switch the rear out-
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same pro-
portion both vertically and horizontally;
ideal for a cinema-sized picture (wide
screen picture).
put setting.
When no subwoofer is connected to the rear
output, select Full.
When a subwoofer is connected to the rear
output, select Sub. W.
Normal (normal)
A 4:3 picture is displayed normally, giving
you no sense of disparity since its propor-
tions are the same as that of the normal
picture.
Switching the muting/
attenuation timing
p Different settings can be stored for each
video source.
p The same setting is automatically applied
for the following grouping.
You can mute the AV source volume or attenu-
ate the output signal. This setting is invalid for
the mute signal has been received from the
MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit.
(Even if this setting is [Off], the navigation sys-
tem will mute or attenuate the audio source
volume when the signal is output via MUTE
lead.)
!
!
!
!
DVD-V, DVD-VR, DivX
EXT1 and EXT2
AV1 and AV2
iPod
p When video is viewed in a wide screen
mode that does not match its original as-
pect ratio, it may look strange.
%
Touch [Mute] on the “AV System Set-
tings” menu.
Each touch of [Mute] changes the settings as
follows:
p Remember that use of this system for com-
mercial or public viewing purposes may
constitute an infringement on the author’s
rights protected by the Copyright Law.
p The navigation map and the rear view cam-
era picture is always viewed at Full.
!
Guide/Tel/VR — The volume is muted or at-
tenuated according to the following condi-
tions
161
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
32
Customizing preferences
— When the navigation outputs the gui-
dance voice.
— When you use a cellular phone via Blue-
tooth technology (dialing, talking, in-
coming call).
Changing the voice output of
the navigation guidance
You can set the speaker to output the naviga-
tion guidance and phone voice, etc.
— When the voice recognition mode is ac-
tivated.
%
Touch [Guidance/Tel SP] on the “AV Sys-
tem Settings” menu.
Each touch of [Guidance/Tel SP] changes the
settings as follows:
!
!
Tel/VR — The volume is muted or attenu-
ated according to the following conditions
— When you use a cellular phone via Blue-
tooth technology (dialing, talking, in-
coming call).
— When the voice recognition mode is ac-
tivated.
Off — The volume does not change
!
L+R SP — Uses both the front right and left
speakers
Left SP — Uses only the front left speaker
Right SP — Uses only the front right speak-
!
!
er
p Operation returns to normal when the cor-
respond action is ended.
Acquiring/Cataloging iPod
music information
Switching the muting/
attenuation level
You can select the muting/attenuation level of
[Mute]. This setting is also effective for a mute
signal that has been received from the MUTE
lead connected to the navigation unit.
p This menu is not available when AV source
is [Off].
If you always set the language other than “Eng-
lish” on “Voice Language”, this setting is un-
necessary.
Unless [VR Catalog Mode] is turned off, this
navigation system tries to acquire the informa-
tion needed to operate iPod with voice com-
mands. It may take a short period of time to
transfer the information. Change the setting
according to your usage.
%
Touch [Mute Level] on the “AV System
Settings” menu.
The navigation system starts acquiring/catalo-
ging music information (1) when the iPod is
connected or when the system boots up while
the iPod is connected and (2) when iPod is the
selected and displayed AV Source, unless [VR
Catalog Mode] is turned off.
Each touch of [Mute Level] changes the set-
tings as follows:
!
!
!
20dB — The volume becomes 1/10
10dB — The volume becomes 1/3
All — The volume becomes 0
p When you select [All], no audio adjust-
ments are possible during the sound is
turned off.
p This function is available when [Change
Control Mode] is set to [Navi].
p If you do not use iPod, this setting is un-
necessary.
p During transfer, iPod operations (such as
[Shuffle], [MENU], or [Video]) are not
available.
p When you select [20dB] or [10dB], no audio
adjustments are possible during the sound
is attenuated.
p Operation returns to normal when the cor-
respond action is ended.
p Even when a mute signal has been received
from MUTE lead connected to the naviga-
tion unit, navigation voice guidance cannot
be attenuated or muted.
162
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing preferences
32
p Once the cataloging is completed, you can
deactivate [VR Catalog Menu] until you
update the content/data on iPod. If you up-
date the iPod data, activate [VR Catalog
Menu] again to transfer the music informa-
tion and synchronize the music information
for voice commands with the data on iPod.
p After you select “Off” in [VR Catalog
Mode], the system doesn’t catalog the
data on the iPod. In such case, the pre-
viously cataloged data are available as
voice commands.
p Once you start the cataloging process, only
a few basic voice commands can be used
for iPod until the process has completely
finished.
p If unreadable characters are included in
the data on your iPod, names or types may
not be available as voice commands.
2
Touch [On] or [Off] to activate or deacti-
vate “VR Catalog Mode”.
Touch [Cancel].
#
Stops the cataloging of iPod.
If you want to restart the cataloging of iPod,
touch [Restart].
Displaying your DivX VOD
registration code
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)
content on this navigation system, you first
need to register the unit with your DivX VOD
content provider. You do this by generating a
DivX VOD registration code, which you submit
to your provider.
p This feature is available when the selected
source is CD, ROM, DivX, DVD-V or
DVD-VR.
Important Notice regarding Voice
Control for iPods
%
Touch [DivX VOD] on the “AV System
Settings” menu.
Voice Control for iPods may be limited if cata-
loging of iPod content is not completed. Cata-
loging of iPod content only occurs when the
system is in “AV Source” mode and the “iPod”
is the selected and displayed “AV Source”
screen. Cataloging of iPod content will not
occur if the system is off, if any other “AV
Source” is selected (aside from iPod), or if the
system is in any other mode (aside from “AV
Source” mode) such as “Destination Menu”,
“Settings Menu”, “Phone Menu” or the map
screen. If you wish to use Voice Control for all
iPod content, it is recommended that you first
connect your iPod, select “iPod” as the AV
source, and keep the iPod screen displayed
until cataloging is completed — cataloging of
iPod content should only take a few minutes,
and will depend on the size of the content
stored on your iPod. A message will be dis-
played when cataloging is completed.
Your 8-digit registration code is displayed.
p Make a note of the code as you will need it
when you register with a DivX VOD
provider.
The “AV Sound Settings”
menu options
Displaying the “AV Sound
Settings” menu
1
Press the HOME button to display the
“Top Menu”.
2
Touch [Settings].
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.
3
Touch [AV Sound].
The “AV Sound Settings” screen appears.
1
Touch [VR Catalog Menu] on the “AV
System Settings” menu.
163
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
32
Customizing preferences
p You cannot make adjustments in the follow-
ing situations:
Left:15 to Right:15 is displayed as the left/
right speaker balance moves from left to right.
— AV source is [Off]
— During muting/attenuation
p You cannot select [SLA] when the FM tuner
is selected as the AV source.
Using the equalizer
The equalizer lets you adjust equalization to
match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics
as desired.
Using balance adjustment
You can select a fader/balance setting that
provides an ideal listening environment in all
occupied seats.
Recalling equalizer curves
There are seven stored equalizer curves that
you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list
of the equalizer curves:
1
Touch [FAD/BAL] on the “AV Sound Set-
tings” menu.
Equalizer curve
When [Sub. W] is selected in [Rear SP],
[Balance] will be displayed instead of
[FAD/BAL] and front/rear speaker balance
cannot be adjusted.
Super Bass
Super Bass is a curve in which only low-pitched
sound is boosted.
Powerful
Powerful is a curve in which low-pitched and high-
pitched sounds are boosted.
Natural
Natural is a curve in which low-pitched and high-
pitched sounds are slightly boosted.
2
Touch [a] or [b] to adjust front/rear
speaker balance.
Vocal
Each time you touch [a] or [b], the front/rear
speaker balance moves towards the front or
the rear.
“Front:15” to “Rear:15” is displayed as the
front/rear speaker balance moves from front to
rear.
Vocal is a curve in which the midrange, which is the
human vocal range, is boosted.
Flat
Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.
Custom1
Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-
ate. A separate custom curve can be created for each
source.
Setting “Front:” and “Rear:” to “0” is correct
when using a two speaker system.
Custom2
3
Touch [c] or [d] to adjust left/right
Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-
ate. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected all
AV source.
speaker balance.
Each time you touch [c] or [d], the left/right
speaker balance moves towards the left or the
right.
164
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing preferences
32
1
Touch [EQ] on the “AV Sound Settings”
The difference between “Custom1” and
menu.
“Custom2”
!
A separate Custom1 curve can be created
for each source. If you make adjustments
when a curve Super Bass, Powerful,
Natural, Vocal, Flat, or Custom1 is se-
lected, the equalizer curve settings will be
memorized in Custom1.
!
!
A Custom2 curve can be created common
to all sources. If you make adjustments
when Custom2 curve is selected, the Cus-
tom2 curve will be updated.
The adjusted Custom1 curve is memorized
for each of the source selected, but one
curve is shared for the following sources.
— CD, ROM, DVD-V, DVD-VR, DivX
— AM and FM
— EXT1 and EXT2
— AV1 and AV2
— SD and USB
— XM and SIRIUS
2
Touch the equalizer you want.
Adjusting the preset equalizer curve
effect
You can adjust the effect of the preset equali-
zer curves.
The following equalizer curves can be ad-
justed:
!
!
The different source volume level can be
set between iPod and USB.
!
!
!
!
Super Bass
Powerful
Natural
Vocal
When [Flat] is selected, no supplement or
correction is made to the sound. This is
useful to check the effect of the equalizer
curves by switching alternatively between
[Flat] and a set equalizer curve.
1
Touch [EQ] on the “AV Sound Settings”
menu.
1
Touch [EQ] on the “AV Sound Settings”
menu.
2
3
Touch the equalizer you want.
2
Touch the one of keys to select a curve
that you want to use as the basis of custo-
mizing.
Touch [+] or [–] next to “Nuance”.
p The level can be adjusted in the range of –6
to +6.
p If [Natural] is selected, the level can be ad-
justed in the range of –4 to +6.
3
4
Touch [Customize].
Touch the frequency that you want to
adjust the level.
Adjusting the equalizer curves
You can adjust the currently selected equalizer
curve setting as desired. Adjustments can be
made with a 7-band graphic equalizer.
5
Touch [a] or [b] to adjust the level of
the equalizer band.
Each time you touch [a] or [b], the level of
the equalization band increases or decreases.
165
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
32
Customizing preferences
Adjusting loudness
5
Touch [c] or [d] next to
“Frequency(Hz)” to select cut-off fre-
quency.
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.
Each time you touch [c] or [d], cut-off fre-
quencies are selected in the following order:
50 Hz — 63 Hz — 80 Hz — 100 Hz — 125 Hz
Only frequencies lower than those in the se-
lected range are output from the subwoofer.
1
Touch [Loudness] on the “AV Sound
Settings” menu.
2
Touch [Loudness] to select the level you
want.
Using the high pass filter
Each time you touch [Loudness], the level is
selected in the following order:
Off — Low — Mid — High
When you do not want low sounds from the
subwoofer output frequency range to play
from the front or rear speakers, activate HPF
(high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than
those in the selected range are output from
the front or rear speakers.
Using subwoofer output
The navigation system is equipped with a sub-
woofer output mechanism, which can be
turned on or off.
p Only when “Sub Woofer” is [On], you can
adjust “Phase”, “Level” and
1
Touch [HPF] on the “AV Sound Settings”
menu.
“Frequency(Hz)”.
2
Touch [HPF] to select cut-off frequency.
Each time you touch [HPF] selects cut-off fre-
quencies in the following order:
Off — 50 Hz — 63 Hz — 80 Hz — 100 Hz —
125 Hz
1
Touch [Sub Woofer] on the “AV Sound
Settings” menu.
2
Touch [On] to turn subwoofer output
on.
Adjusting source levels
To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off].
SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust
the volume level of each source to prevent ra-
dical changes in volume when switching be-
tween sources.
p Settings are based on the FM tuner volume
level, which remains unchanged.
1
Compare the FM tuner volume level
with the level of the source you wish to ad-
just.
3
Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select
2
Touch [SLA] on the “AV Sound Settings”
menu.
the phase of subwoofer output.
4
Touch [+] or [–] next to “Level” to adjust
the output level.
+6 to –24 is displayed as the level is increased
or decreased.
166
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Customizing preferences
32
3
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the source vo-
2
Touch desired stage setting.
lume.
+8dB to –8dB is displayed as the source vo-
lume is increased or decreased.
The following AV sources are set to the same
source level adjustment volume automatically.
!
!
!
!
!
!
DVD-V and DVD-VR
CD, ROM, DivX
EXT1 and EXT2
AV1 and AV2
SD and USB
XM and SIRIUS
p [Living Room] setting that emphasizes
mid-range sound hardly has any effect near
the maximum volume level.
p When you set staging to an option other
than [Off], the high pass filter (HPF) setting
turns [Off].
p The different source volume level can be set
between iPod and USB.
Enhancing bass (Bass Booster)
The “Bass Booster” enhances bass sounds,
which can be muted by driving noise.
1
Touch [Bass Booster] on the “AV Sound
Adjusting a position effect
You can select a listener position that you
want to make as the center of sound effects.
Settings” menu.
1
Touch [Staging] on the “AV Sound Set-
2
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the range from
tings” menu.
0 to 6.
2
3
Touch [Position].
Touch desired position.
Setting the simulated sound stage
You can select the desired effect from various
simulated sound stages, such as Music Studio
or Dynamic Theater. You can also adjust a lis-
tener positioning effect.
Setting a stage that fits your image
1
Touch [Staging] on the “AV Sound Set-
tings” menu.
167
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
33
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
p The voice operation may not be operable for a
To Ensure Safe Driving
minute after the navigation system has booted
up.
p Voice operation will be activated 30 seconds
after the map screen is displayed.
If the VOICE button does not respond, display
the disclaimer screen and then touch [OK].
The map screen is displayed.
CAUTION
For your safety, avoid viewing the screen in the
voice operation as much as possible while
driving.
If you use voice operation, select [English] in
[Voice Language] of “Language”. If you select
other languages, voice operation will not be
available.
Starting voice operation
%
Press the VOICE button when the map
screen or the AV operation screen is dis-
played.
The voice operation screen appears.
Basics of Voice Operation
Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest
in voice recognition technology. You can use
voice commands to operate many of its func-
tions. This chapter describes where you can
use voice commands, and also what com-
mands the system accepts.
1
2
p This function is not available while the cata-
loging of iPod is created.
1
2
:
Flow of voice operation
You can listen to the brief operating in-
struction.
You can start voice operation any time even
when the map screen is displayed or audio is
operating. (Some operations are not available.)
The basic steps of voice operations are as
follows.
:
cancels voice operation.
You can cancel the voice operation feature
at any time by saying “Cancel”. After you
cancel voice operations, the display returns
to the screen displayed before the voice op-
eration screen appeared.
1
Switch the screen to map screen or AV
operation screen.
2
Press the VOICE button to activate
voice operations.
How to use the voice operation
Searching for a location by address
In this example, you want to search for a loca-
tion by address and set it as your destination.
3
Speak a command into the microphone
after the beep.
4
When the command is recognized, the
navigation system displays next options on
1
Press the MODE button to display the
the screen, and pronounces it in some case-
s.
map screen or the AV operation screen.
2
Press the VOICE button to activate
5
Repeat previous step as necessary.
voice operations.
6
out.
The requested operation will be carried
A list of commands for voice operation ap-
pears. After the message, the beep indicates
that the system is ready to accept your voice
command. Say a command after this beep.
168
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
33
3
Say “I need directions”.
Calling the entry on “Contacts”
A message prompting you to select a search
by address or by POI appears.
A method for dialing the entry named “Nancy”
is described here along with an operational ex-
ample.
4
Say “Find an address”.
A message to prompt the next operation is
given.
1
Press the VOICE button to activate
voice operations.
5
Say a command according the message
2
Say “Call Nancy” to make a call.
displayed on the screen.
The message confirming whether to dial ap-
pears.
p When the list of candidates with number
appears, say the number that you want to
select.
3
Say “Yes”.
Dialing starts.
When you select the entry next to “1”, say
“Number One”.
p If there are multiple items that correspond
to the name you gave, the list screen ap-
pears. In this case, touch the item you want
to select from the list.
Operating iPod by voice
You can play music using voice operation from
the iPod connected to the navigation system.
p To use the content/data on the iPod for
voice operation, transfer the data to this
system first.
Search for POI in vicinity
Examples of voice operation of the iPod are
shown below. (A method for playing the album
title named “Pioneer” is described here, along
with an operational example.)
In this example, you want to search for a POI
and set it as your destination.
1
Press the MODE button to display the
map screen or the AV operation screen.
2
Press the VOICE button to activate
voice operations.
1
Press the VOICE button to activate
A list of commands for voice operation ap-
pears. After the message, the beep indicates
that the system is ready to accept your voice
command. Say a command after this beep.
voice operations.
2
Say “Change Source” to display the AV
source selection screen.
3
Say “iPod” on the selection screen to
3
Say “I need directions”.
switch the AV source to iPod.
A message prompting you to select a search
by address or by POI appears.
p Touching the item on the screen also en-
ables you to select the desired AV source.
4
Say “Point of interest”.
4
Press the VOICE button to activate
A message to prompt the next operation is
given.
voice operations.
5
Say “Play the album Pioneer” to play-
5
Say a command according the message
back the album name “Pioneer”.
displayed on the screen.
If the command is recognized properly, play-
back starts from the first song of “Pioneer”.
p When the list of candidates with number
appears, say the number that you want to
select.
When you select the entry next to “1”, say
“Number One”.
p If there are multiple items that correspond
to the name you gave, the list screen ap-
pears. In this case, touch the item you want
to select from the list.
169
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
33
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
Available Basic Voice Commands
The navigation system can also recognize the
words in the following list.
Basic commands
Voice commands and operations
Back d Returns the previous screen.
Cancel d Cancels the voice operation.
Help d Outputs the brief operating instruction by voice.
Next page, Previous page d Switch the page.
Last page, First page d Switch to the last or first page.
Voice operation for the iPod
For <Artist name>, <Album name>, <Play-
list name>, <Genre name> shown on the fol-
lowing chart, say the name their name in the
iPod.
p Playback of iPod movies is not available
using voice commands.
Voice commands and operations
Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly.
Resume d Resumes the song or the video currently playing .
Pause d Pauses the song or the video currently playing .
Next song d Plays the next song.
Previous song d Plays the previous song or return to the beginning of the song currently playing.
Play songs d Start playback from the top of “Songs”.
Play artists d Displays the artist list d Say the artist name that you want to play.
Play the artist <Artist name> d Start playback from the top of the selected artist.
Play albums d Displays the album list d Say the album name that you want to play.
Play the album <Album name> d Start playback from the top of the selected album.
Play playlists d Displays the playlist d Say the playlist that you want to play.
Play the playlist <Playlist name> d Start playback from the top of the selected playlist.
Play genres d Displays the genre list d Say the genre that you want to play.
Play the genre <Genre name> d Start playback from the top of the selected genre.
Browse artists d Displays the artist list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired
voice commands.
Browse the artist <Artist name> d Displays the album list of the selected artist together with sub-screen to con-
tinue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands.
Browse albums d Displays the album list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the de-
sired voice commands.
Browse the album <Album name> d Displays the song list of the selected album together with sub-screen to con-
tinue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands.
170
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
33
Browse playlists d Displays the playlist together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired
voice commands.
Browse the playlist <Playlist name> d Displays the song list of the selected playlist together with sub-screen to
continue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands.
Browse genre d Displays the genre list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired
voice commands.
Browse the genre <Genre name> d Displays the song list of the selected genre list together with sub-screen to con-
tinue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands.
Play more music artist d Plays the songs related to the currently playing artist.
Play more music album d Plays the songs related to the currently playing album.
Play more music genre d Plays the songs related to the currently playing genre.
Next page, Previous page d Displays the previous or next page of the selection list. (Note 1)
First page, Last page d Displays the first or last page of the selection list. (Note 1)
(Note 1) The voice commands is available only when the selection list is displayed.
Voice operation for AV source (other than iPod)
AV source selection
Voice commands and operations
Change Source to DISC d Switch the AV source to Disc.
Change Source to FM d Switch the AV source to FM.
Change Source to AM d Switch the AV source to AM.
Change Source to XM Satellite Radio d Switch the AV source to XM.
Change Source to SIRIUS Satellite Radio d Switch the AV source to SIRIUS.
Change Source to HD Radio d Switch the AV source to Digital Radio.
Change Source to SD Media d Switch the AV source to SD.
Change Source to USB d Switch the AV source to USB.
Change Source to iPod d Switch the AV source to iPod.
Change Source to Bluetooth Audio d Switch the AV source to Bluetooth Audio.
Built-in DVD drive, external storage device (USB, SD)
Voice commands and operations
Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly.
Pause d Pauses the track or file currently playing .
Resume d Resumes the track or file currently playing .
Next song d Plays the next track or file.
Previous song d Plays the previous track or file, or return to the beginning of the track or file currently playing.
171
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
33
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
Voice commands related to hands-free phoning
p You can make a phone call by voice dialing
if the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth
wireless technology is being paired with
the navigation system.
p For <entry’s name> shown on the follow-
ing chart, say the name of the entry stored
in “Contacts”.
p For <phone number> shown on the follow-
ing chart, say the desired phone number.
Voice commands and operations
Call <entry’s name> d Make a call to the entry (Note 2).
Call <entry’s name> general d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dial the general
phone number of the entry (Note 3).
Call <entry’s name> mobile d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dial the cellular
phone number of the entry (Note 3).
Call <entry’s name> home d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dial the home phone
number of the entry (Note 3).
Call <entry’s name> work d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dial the office phone
number of the entry (Note 3).
Call <entry’s name> other d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dial the other phone
number of the entry (Note 3).
Call <phone number> d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dial the phone number.
Make a call d Say the phone number you want to call d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say
Yes d The system starts dialing to the number.
Make a call d Say the name of entry stored on “Contacts” you want to call d Displays the message confirming
whether to dial d Say Yes d The system starts dialing to the number (Note 2).
List outgoing calls d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (“Dialed Calls”) to select the number and call (Note 4).
List recent calls d Incoming calls d Display the list of recently received calls (“Received Calls”) to select the num-
ber and call (Note 4).
List recent calls d Outgoing calls d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (“Dialed Calls”) to select the number
and call (Note 4).
List recent incoming calls d Display the list of recently received calls (“Received Calls”) to select the number and
call (Note 4).
(Note 2) If the entry has multiple phone number data, selection list may appear. In such case, say the type of phone
number.
(Note 3) If there is no corresponding type on the entry, the system may suggest you other phone numbers of the entry.
In such case, say the type of phone number.
(Note 4) Touching the item on the screen also enables you to select the desired list.
172
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
Tips for Voice Operation
33
For your voice commands to be correctly re-
cognized and interpreted, ensure that condi-
tions are suitable for recognition.
Close the vehicle windows
Please note that wind through the vehicle win-
dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the
vehicle can interfere with voice operation.
Position the microphone carefully
For optimum pick-up, the microphone should
be fixed at a suitable distance directly in front
of the driver.
Pause before giving a command
Speaking too soon may cause the recognition
to fail.
Pronounce your commands carefully
Speak slowly, deliberately, and clearly.
173
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
34
Other functions
Entering the password
Setting the anti-theft function
On the password input screen, you must enter
the current password. If you enter an incorrect
password three times, the screen is locked
and operations using touch panel keys are dis-
abled.
You can set a password for the navigation sys-
tem. If the back-up lead is cut after the pass-
word is set, the navigation system prompts for
the password at the time of next boot up.
1
Enter the password.
Setting the password
1
Press the HOME button to display the
2
Touch [OK].
“Top Menu”.
The message “The unit has been locked be-
cause an invalid password was entered
three times. Turn ACC off and on, and
enter your password.” appears if you entered
the correct password and the navigation sys-
tem is unlocking.
2
Touch [Settings].
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.
3
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and
then touch and hold Area3.
Area1
Area2
Area3
Deleting the password
The current password can be deleted.
1
Press the HOME button to display the
“Top Menu”.
2
3
Touch [Settings] on the “Top Menu”.
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and
then touch and hold Area3.
4
Touch [Set Password].
4
Touch [Clear password].
The password setting screen appears.
The password setting screen appears.
5
Enter the password you want to set.
p 5 to 16 characters can be entered for a
password.
5
6
7
Enter the current password.
Touch [OK].
6
7
Touch [OK].
Touch [Yes].
The message for deletion appears and then
the current password is deleted.
Reenter the password to confirm the
setting.
8
Touch [OK].
Forgotten passwords
Contact the nearest authorized Pioneer Ser-
vice Station.
Password protection is applied.
p If you want to change the password cur-
rently set, enter the current password and
then enter the new one.
174
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Other functions
34
Restoring the default setting
Resets various settings registered to the navi-
gation system and restores them to the default
or factory settings.
Returning the navigation
system to the default or
factory settings
You can return settings or recorded content to
the default or factory settings. There are four
methods to clear user data, and the situations
and the cleared content are different for each
method. For information regarding the content
that is cleared by each method, see the list
presented later.
tings before you operate this function.
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.
2
Touch [Restore Factory Settings].
Method 1: The battery of the vehicle is
removed or the yellow lead of the
navigation system is disconnected.
Clears almost all settings of the AV function.
The message confirming whether to restore
the settings appears.
3
Touch [Yes].
Method 2: Touch [Restore Factory
Settings].
This clears some items in the “Navi Settings”
menu, the “System Settings” menu and the
“Bluetooth Settings” menu.
Returning the navigation
system to the initial state
You can return settings or recorded content to
the default or factory settings.
tings before you operate this function.
Method 3: Touch [Clear user information]
on the “Select Items to Reset” screen.
Clears almost all settings and user data of the
navigation function and the phone function.
1
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and
turn off the engine. Turn the ignition key
back to “Acc off”. Then start the engine
again, and turn the power to the naviga-
tion system back on.
Method 4: Touch [Reset] on the “Select
Items to Reset” screen.
The splash screen appears.
Clears almost all settings and user data of the
navigation function and the phone function.
2
Press and hold the MODE button and
the TRK (c) button while splash screen ap-
pears.
The “Select Items to Reset” screen appears.
3
Touch [Clear user information].
The message confirming whether to erase all
user data appears.
And then touch [Yes] to erase all user data.
#
Touch [Reset].
Various settings registered to the navigation sys-
tem is reset to the default or factory settings.
4
Touch [Yes].
The recorded contents are cleared.
175
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
34
Other functions
Setting items to be deleted
The items to be deleted vary depending on the
reset method. The items listed in the following
table return to the default or factory settings.
p Almost all items not listed below will be re-
tained. However, some of the items to be re-
turned to their default values are not listed
if the setting value can be easily recovered
by user, such as the last map scale, the last
status of AV operation screen, etc.
— : The setting will be retained.
1: The setting will be cleared and returned to
the default or factory settings.
Navigation functions
Method 1
Method 2
Method 3
Method 4
View mode and scale setting on
the map
—
—
—
1
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Map function
Direction of the map
Last cursor position on the map
screen
1
Current route
—
—
Guidance state of the current
route
—
Route Setting
Vehicle position information
Route conditions
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
—
1
1
1
1
1
—
—
1
1
1
—
1
1
1
Point registered in [Favorites]
[History]
—
—
1
[Destination]
All settings on “MSN Direct”
[View Mode]
—
1
Map Settings
menu
Other settings
[3D Calibration Status]
[Set Home]
—
—
—
1
[Navi Settings]
[Modify Current Location]
Other settings
[Program Language], [Voice
Language]
—
—
1
1
[Time]
—
1
—
—
1
1
—
1
1
—
1
[System Settings]
[Back Camera]
Other settings
—
176
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter
Other functions
34
[Phone Menu]
All settings
menu
—
—
1
1
1
Other functions
Anti-theft password
—
—
—
AV functions
Volume
Method 1
Method 2
Method 3
Method 4
1
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
[AV Settings]
[AV Sound]
All settings
All settings
Function of each
source
All settings
1
—
—
—
[Picture Adjustment]
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Other functions
Tilt
177
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Troubleshooting
If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common
problems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. If a solution to your problem
cannot be found here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.
Problems with the navigation screen
Symptom
Cause
Action (Reference)
The power doesn’t turn on. The Leads and connectors are incor-
navigation system doesn’t oper- rectly connected.
Confirm once more that all connections are
correct.
ate.
The fuse is blown.
Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then
replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a cor-
rect fuse with the same rating.
Noise and other factors are causing Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off
the built-in microprocessor to oper- the engine. Turn the ignition key back to “Acc
ate incorrectly.
off”. Then start the engine again, and turn the
power to the navigation system back on.
You cannot position your vehicle The quality of signals from the GPS Check the GPS signal reception and the posi-
on the map without a significant satellites is poor, causing reduced
tion of the GPS antenna if necessary, or con-
positioning error.
positioning accuracy. Such a loss of tinue driving until reception improves. Keep
signal quality may occur for the fol- the antenna clear.
lowing reasons:
—The GPS antenna is in an unsuita-
ble location.
—Obstacles are blocking signals
from the satellites.
—The position of satellites relative
to your vehicle is inadequate.
—Signals from the GPS satellites
have been modified to reduce accu-
racy. (GPS satellites are operated by
the US Department of Defense, and
the US government reserves the
right to distort positioning data for
military reasons. This may lead to
greater positioning errors.)
—If a vehicle phone or cellular
phone is used near the GPS anten-
na, GPS reception may be lost tem-
porarily.
Something covers the GPS antenna. Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray
paint or vehicle wax, because this may block
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup
can also degrade the signals.
Signals from the vehicle’s speed
pulse are not being picked up prop- If necessary, consult the dealer that installed
erly. the system.
Check that the cables are properly connected.
178
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
The navigation system may not be
mounted securely in your vehicle.
Check that the navigation system is securely
mounted and, if necessary, consult the dealer
that installed the system.
You cannot position your vehicle
on the map without a significant
positioning error.
The navigation system is installed
with an extreme angle exceeding
the installation angle limitations.
Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-
tion system must be installed within the al-
lowed installation angle. For details, refer to
“Installation Manual”.)
Indication of the position of your ve- Check whether or not the reverse gear signal
hicle is misaligned after a U-turn or input lead (violet) is connected properly. (The
reversing.
navigation system works properly without the
lead connected, but positioning accuracy will
be adversely affected.)
The map color does not switch [Day/Night Display] is set to [Day]. Check [Day/Night Display] setting and make
automatically between daytime
and nighttime.
The orange/white lead is not con-
nected.
Check the connection.
The screen is too bright.
The display is very dim.
“Brightness”.
The vehicle’s light is turned ON, and Read about [Day/Night Display] setting and,
[Automatic] is selected on [Day/
Night Display].
“Brightness”.
No sounds of AV source are pro- The volume level is low.
Adjust the volume level.
Turn the attenuator or mute off.
Check the connection.
duced.
The attenuator or mute is on.
The volume level will not rise.
A speaker lead is disconnected.
The volume of navigation gui-
Try to adjust them with VOL (+/–)
Turn the volume up or down using [Volume]
dance and beeps cannot be ad- button.
justed.
The person on the other end of The voice from the person on the
Use the following methods to reduce the
the phone call cannot hear the other end of the phone call is output echo:
conversation due to an echo.
from the speakers and then picked —Lower the volume on the receiver
up by the microphone again, creat- —Have both parties pause slightly before
ing an echo.
speaking
There’s no picture.
The parking brake cord is not con-
nected.
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply
the parking brake.
The parking brake is not applied.
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply
the parking brake.
The backlight of the LCD panel is
turned off.
Turn on the backlight. (Page 102)
“Rear display” picture disap-
The source disc being listened to in Before ejecting the disc, switch the source.
pears.
the navigation system has been
ejected.
This problem may occur when certain con-
nection methods are used.
There is a problem with the “Rear
display”, for example a faulty wiring
connection.
Check the “Rear display” and its connection.
An AV source that cannot output to Select an appropriate AV source.
the rear display is selected.
179
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
The setting for the rear view camera Select the appropriate setting for the rear
is incorrect.
view camera.
Nothing is displayed and the
touch panel keys cannot be
used.
The shift lever was placed in [R]
Select the correct polarity setting for [Back
connected.
There is no response when the The touch panel keys deviate from
touch panel key are touched, or the actual positions that respond to
Perform touch panel calibration. (Page 100)
a different key responds.
your touch for some reason.
The external storage device
(USB, SD) cannot be used.
The USB storage device has been
removed immediately after plugging the engine. Turn the ignition key back to “Acc
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off
it.
off”. Then start the engine again, and turn the
power to the navigation system back on.
Problems in the AV screen
Symptom
Cause
Action (Reference)
CD or DVD playback is not pos- The disc is inserted upside down.
Insert the disc with the label upward.
Clean the disc.
sible.
The disc is dirty.
The disc is cracked or otherwise da- Insert a normal, round disc.
maged.
The files on the disc are an irregular Check the file format.
file format.
The disc format cannot be played
back.
Replace the disc.
The loaded disc is a type this system Check what type of disc it is. (For more cau-
cannot play.
tions about handling each type of media,
refer to Page 192.)
The screen is covered by a cau- The parking brake lead is not con-
tion message and the video can- nected or applied.
not be shown.
Connect the parking brake lead correctly, and
apply the parking brake.
The parking brake interlock is acti- Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply
vated.
the parking brake.
equipments.
is incorrect.
No video output from connected
iPod.
The connection of the USB interface Connect both the USB plug and the RCA
cable for iPod is incorrect.
cable side. (If only one of these connection
has been made, the iPod will not work prop-
erly.) (Page 31)
The audio or video skips.
The navigation system is not firmly Secure the navigation system firmly.
secured.
No sounds are produced.
Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.
The volume level will not rise.
The system is performing still, slow There is no sound during still, slow motion, or
motion, or frame-by-frame playback frame-by-frame playback with DVD-Video.
with DVD-Video.
The system is paused or performing, For the media other than music CD (CD-DA),
fast reverse or forward during the
disc playback.
there is no sound on fast reverse or forward.
The icon 9 is displayed, and op- The operation is not compatible
This operation is not possible. (For example,
the DVD playing does not feature that angle,
audio system, subtitle language, etc.)
eration is not possible.
with the video configuration.
180
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
The reading of data is impossible
during disc playback.
After touching g once, start playback once
more.
The picture stops (pauses) and
the navigation system cannot be
operated.
The picture is stretched, with in- The aspect setting is incorrect for
correct aspect ratio. the display.
Select the appropriate setting for that image.
A parental lock message is dis- Parental lock is on.
played and DVD playback is not
possible.
Turn parental lock off or change the level.
Parental lock for DVD playback The code number is incorrect.
cannot be canceled.
Input the correct code number. (Page 129)
Playback is not with the audio
language and subtitle language dialog or subtitles in the language
settings selected in [DVD/
The DVD playing does not feature
Switching to a selected language is not possi-
ble if the language selected in [DVD/DivX®
selected in [DVD/DivX® Setup].
DivX® Setup].
The picture is extremely unclear/ The disc features a signal to prohibit Since the navigation system is compatible
distorted and dark during play- copying. (Some discs may have
with the copy guard analogue copy protect
system, the picture may suffer from horizon-
tal stripes or other imperfections when a disc
with that kind of protection signal is viewed
on some displays. This does not mean the na-
vigation system is malfunctioning.
back.
this.)
iPod cannot be operated.
The iPod is frozen.
! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface
cable for iPod.
! Update the iPod software version.
An error has occurred.
! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface
cable for iPod.
! Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn
off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to
“Acc off”. Then start the engine again, and
turn the power to the navigation system back
on.
! Update the iPod software version.
Problems with the phone screen
Symptom Cause
Action (Reference)
Dialing is not possible because Your phone is out of range for ser-
the touch panel keys for dialing vice.
are inactive.
Retry after re-entering the range for service.
The connection between the cellular Perform the connection process.
phone and the navigation system
cannot be established now.
If the screen becomes frozen...
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off
the engine. Turn the ignition key back to “Acc
off”. Then start the engine again, and turn the
power to the navigation system back on.
181
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Messages and how to react to them
The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system. Refer to the table below to
identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action.
There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a
case, follow the instructions given on the display.
Messages and how to react to them
Message
Cause
Action (Reference)
Route calculation was not
possible.
Route calculation has failed be-
cause of a malfunction in map data, ! Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-
! Change the destination.
software, or hardware.
sage persists.
Route calculation not possi-
ble. Destination too far.
The destination is too far.
Set a destination closer to the starting point.
Route calculation not possi-
ble. Destination too close.
The destination is too close.
Set a destination farther from the starting
point.
Route calculation not possi-
The destination, waypoint(s), or
! Set a destination and waypoint(s) on roads.
ble. Navigation cannot be pro- starting point are in an area where ! Reset the destination after you drive the ve-
vided around destination or
starting point.
no road exists (e.g. a mountain) and hicle to any road.
the route calculation is impossible.
Route to destination cannot
be calculated.
The destination or waypoint(s) are in Change the destination.
an isolated island, etc. without a
ferry and the route calculation is im-
possible. If there is no road con-
nected to your starting point or
destination, this message will ap-
pear.
Failed to create route profile In rare cases, a route calculation
! Retry.
error may occur.
! Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-
sage persists.
No picture folder. Save jpeg
file to /Pictures/ folder
Cannot load the image because
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.
inserted external storage device.
“Pictures” folder exists on the SD
memory card but there is no load-
able data in the folder.
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.
Data Read error.
The file is corrupt
Failed to read the data for some rea- Use appropriate data and store it correctly.
son. (Page 99)
The data is damaged or an attempt Use appropriate data and store it correctly.
was not made to specifications as
the splash screen.
182
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire- Activate the target phone’s Bluetooth wire-
less technology is turned off.
less technology.
Connection failed.
The cellular phone is paired (con-
nected) with another device.
Cancel the pairing (connection) and retry.
Rejection has been received from
the cellular phone.
Operate the target phone and accept the con-
nection request from the navigation system.
(Furthermore, check the connection settings
on your cellular phone.)
The target cellular phone cannot be Check whether your cellular phone is acti-
found.
vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-
lar phone is not too far.
Could not find any available
phone.
No available phone exists in the sur- ! Activate the target phone’s Bluetooth wire-
roundings when the system
less technology.
searches for connectable cellular
! Check whether your cellular phone is acti-
phones featuring Bluetooth wireless vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-
technology. lar phone is not too far.
Registration failed.
The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire- Keep turning the target phone’s Bluetooth
less technology is turned off during wireless technology on during the registra-
the registration step.
tion.
Rejection by the cellular phone has Operate the target phone and accept the re-
received.
gistration request from the navigation system.
(Furthermore, check the connection settings
on your cellular phone.)
Registration step has failed for
some reason.
Retry the registration and if the registration
still fails, try registering using your cellular
phone.
183
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Messages for audio functions
When problems occur with AV source playback, an error message appears on the display. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error
persists, record the error message and contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer service center.
The messages in “( )” will appear on the “Rear display”.
Built-in DVD drive
Message
Cause
Action (Reference)
Reading error
Dirty
Clean the disc.
(ERROR-02-XX)
Scratched disc
Replace the disc.
The disc is loaded upside down
Check that the disc is loaded correctly.
Playback error. Please remove Electrical or mechanical
! Replace the disc.
the disc.
! Set the ACC to Off and then set it to On
again.
Region code cannot be
The disc does not have the same re- Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing the
matched (DIFFERENT REGION gion number as the navigation sys- correct region number.
DISC)
tem.
Unreadable disc
This type of disc cannot be played
by the navigation system
Replace the disc with one the navigation sys-
tem can play. (Page 209)
Playback error due to irregu- The temperature of the navigation
Wait until the unit’s temperature returns to
lar temperature. Please re-
move the disc. (THERMAL
PROTECTION IN MOTION)
system is outside of the normal op- within normal operating limits.
erating range.
ERROR-FF-FF
Undefined error
Set the ACC to Off and then set it to On
again.
Tracks that cannot be played Files that are protected by digital
The protected files are skipped.
back will be skipped (FILE
rights management.
SKIPPED)
Cannot play back all tracks
(PROCETED DISC)
All the files on the inserted disc are Replace the disc.
secured by DRM.
Flash writing error. Impossible The playback history for VOD con-
! Retry.
to write on the flash. (CAN
tents cannot be saved for some rea- ! If the message appears frequently, consult
NOT SAVE DATA)
son.
your dealer.
Authorization Error (AUTHOR- The device does not match the de-
IZATION ERROR)
Check whether this device has been regis-
vice registered with the VOD provi- tered with the VOD provider.
der. VOD content cannot be played
back.
Cannot play back HD file (FILE High definition (HD) DivX video can- Create playable one and retry.
NOT PLAYABLE-HIGH DEF)
not play.
SD/USB/iPod
Message
Cause
Action (Reference)
Tracks that cannot be played Files that are protected by digital
The protected files are skipped.
back will be skipped
rights management.
this unit.
184
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
All the files on the inserted external Store playable files.
storage device are secured by DRM.
Cannot play back all tracks
All of the files cannot be played by
this unit.
Replace it with the playable file. (Page 195)
USB flash drive was discon-
The USB connector or USB cable is Confirm that the USB connector or USB
nected for device protection. short-circuited.
Do not connect this USB flash
cable is not caught in something or da-
maged.
drive to the unit. To restart
USB, restart the unit.
The connected USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device and do
consumes more than 500 mA (maxi- not use it. Turn the ignition switch to OFF,
mum allowable current).
then to ACC or ON and then connect the
compliant USB storage device.
The USB interface cable for iPod is Confirm that USB interface cable for iPod or
short-circuited.
USB cable is not caught in something or da-
maged.
Authorization failure. iPod is The iPod is not compatible with this Use an iPod of a compatible version.
not connected.
navigation system.
Communication failure
! Disconnect the cable from iPod. Once iPod
main menu is displayed, connect the cable
again.
! If the message appears frequently, consult
your dealer.
iPod VR Dictionary being cre- iPod function is restricted because • Wait on the iPod basic screen (Music) until
ated. Please wait.
the navigation system is trying to
acquire the information needed to
“iPod VR Dictionary updated” appears.
• Switch the screen to another screen to can-
operate iPod with voice commands cel the acquiring process. (In such case, the
from the iPod currently connected. acquiring process will resume when the iPod
Creating iPod VR dictionary.
Voice operation is restricted be-
• Wait on the iPod basic screen (Music) until
Some iPod commands are un- cause the navigation system is try- “iPod VR Dictionary updated” appears.
available during this process. ing to acquire the information
• Switch the screen to another screen to can-
needed to operate iPod with voice
cel the acquiring process. (In such case, the
commands from the iPod currently acquiring process will resume when the iPod
connected.
185
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
pulse. So you connect the speed pulse without
fail to get the accuracy of positioning.
p The position of the speed detection circuit
vary depending on the vehicle model. For
details, consult your authorized Pioneer
dealer or an installation professional.
p Some types of vehicles may not output a
speed signal while driving at just a few kilo-
meters per hour. In such a case, the current
location of your vehicle may not be dis-
played correctly while in traffic congestion
or in a parking lot.
Positioning technology
Positioning by GPS
The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a
network of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each
of the satellites, which orbit at a height of
21 000 km, continually broadcasts radio sig-
nals giving time and position information. This
ensures that signals from at least three can be
picked up from any open area on the earth’s
surface.
The accuracy of the GPS information depends
on how good the reception is. When the sig-
nals are strong and reception is good, GPS
can determine latitude, longitude and altitude
for accurate positioning in three dimensions.
But if signal quality is poor, only two dimen-
sions, latitude and longitude, can be obtained
and positioning errors are somewhat greater.
How do GPS and “Dead
Reckoning” work together?
For maximum accuracy, your navigation sys-
tem continually compares GPS data with your
estimated position as calculated from the data
of built-in sensor. However, if only the data
from the built-in sensor is available for a long
period, positioning errors are gradually com-
pounded until the estimated position becomes
unreliable. For this reason, whenever GPS sig-
nals are available, they are matched with the
data of the built-in sensor and used to correct
it for improved accuracy.
p If you use chains on your wheels for winter
driving or put on the spare wheel, errors
may suddenly increase because of differ-
ence in wheel diameter. Initialize the sensor
status and it may recover the accuracy to
normal condition.
Positioning by “Dead Reckoning”
The built-in sensor in the navigation system
also calculates your position. The current loca-
tion is measured by detecting driving distance
with the speed pulse, the turning direction
with the “Gyrosensor” and inclination of the
road with the “G sensor”.
The built-in sensor can even calculate
changes of altitude, and corrects for discre-
pancies in the distance traveled caused by
driving along winding roads or up slopes.
If you use this navigation system with connect-
ing the speed pulse, the system will become
more accurate than no connection of speed
186
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Map matching
When positioning by GPS is
impossible
As mentioned, the positioning systems used
by this navigation system are susceptible to
certain errors. Their calculations may, on occa-
sion, place you in a location on the map where
no road exists. In this situation, the processing
system understands that vehicles travel only
on roads, and can correct your position by ad-
justing it to a nearby road. This is called map
matching.
!
GPS positioning is disabled if signals can-
not be received from more than two GPS
satellites.
!
In some driving conditions, signals from
GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle.
In this case, it is impossible for the system
to use GPS positioning.
In tunnels or en-
closed parking
garages
Under elevated
roads or similar
structures
With map matching
When driving
among high build-
ings
When driving through
a dense forest or tall
trees
!
!
If a car phone or cellular phone is used
near the GPS antenna, GPS reception may
be lost temporarily.
Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray
paint or car wax, because this may block
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup
can also degrade the signals, so keep the
antenna clear.
Without map matching
Handling large errors
Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by
combining GPS, “Dead Reckoning” and map
matching. However, in some situations, these
functions may not work properly, and the error
may become bigger.
p If a GPS signal have not been received for a
long time, your vehicle’s actual position
and the current position mark on the map
may diverge considerably or may not be up-
dated. In such case, once GPS reception is
restored, accuracy will be recovered.
187
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
!
!
If you drive in zigzags.
Conditions likely to cause
noticeable positioning errors
For various reasons, such as the state of the
road you are traveling on and the reception
status of the GPS signal, the actual position of
your vehicle may differ from the position dis-
played on the map screen.
If the road has a series of hairpin bends.
!
!
If you make a shallow turn.
If there is a parallel road.
!
If there is a loop or similar road configura-
tion.
!
!
If there is another road very nearby, such
as in the case of an elevated freeway.
!
!
If you take a ferry.
If you take a recently opened road that is
not on the map.
If you are driving on a long, straight road or
a gently curving road.
188
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
!
!
!
If you are on a steep mountain road with
many height changes.
!
!
If trees or other obstacles block the GPS
signals for a considerable period.
If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-
stop manner, as in a traffic congestion.
If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot
or similar structure using a spiral ramp.
If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si-
milar structure.
!
If you join the road after driving around a
large parking lot.
!
!
When you drive around a traffic circle.
!
If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on a
gravel road or in snow.
When starting driving immediately after
starting the engine.
!
If you put on chains, or change your tires
for ones with a different size.
Route setting information
Route search specifications
Your navigation system sets a route to your
destination by applying certain built-in rules to
the map data. This section provides some use-
ful information about how a route is set.
189
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
drive towards your destination for a while,
and try route calculation again.
CAUTION
When a route is calculated, the route and voice
guidance for the route are automatically set.
Also, for day or time traffic regulations, only infor-
mation about traffic regulations applicable at the
time when the route was calculated is shown.
One-way streets and street closures may not be
taken into consideration. For example, if a street
is open during the morning only, but you arrive
later, it would be against the traffic regulations so
you cannot drive along the set route. When driv-
ing, please follow the actual traffic signs. Also,
the system may not know some traffic regula-
tions.
!
When there is a traffic congestion ahead, a
detour route may not be suggested if driv-
ing through the traffic congestion would
still be better than taking the detour.
There may be instances when the starting
point, the waypoint and the destination
point are not on the highlighted route.
The number of traffic circle exits displayed
on the screen may differ from the actual
number of roads.
!
!
Route highlighting
!
Once set, the route is highlighted in bright
color on the map.
!
The calculated route is one example of the
route to your destination decided by the na-
vigation system while taking the type of
streets or traffic regulations into account. It
is not necessarily an optimum route. (In
some cases, you may not be able to set the
streets you want to take. If you need to take
a certain street, set a waypoint on that
street.)
!
The immediate vicinity of your starting
point and destination may not be high-
lighted, and neither will areas with particu-
larly complex road layouts. Consequently,
the route may appear to be cut off on the
display, but voice guidance will continue.
Auto reroute function
!
!
If the destination is too far, there may be in-
stances where the route cannot be set. (If
you want to set a long-distance route going
across several areas, set waypoints along
the way.)
!
If you deviate from the set route, the system
will re-calculate the route from that point
so that you remain on track to the destina-
tion.
This function may not work under certain
conditions.
!
During voice guidance, turns and intersec-
tions from the freeway are announced.
However, if you pass intersections, turns,
and other guidance points in rapid succes-
sion, some may delay or not be announced.
It is possible that guidance may direct you
off a freeway and then back on again.
In some cases, the route may require you
to travel in the opposite direction to your
current heading. In such cases, you are in-
structed to turn around, so please turn
around safely by following the actual traffic
rules.
Handling and care of discs
Some basic precautions are necessary when
handling your discs.
!
!
!
In some cases, a route may begin on the
opposite side of a railway or river from your
actual current location. If this happens,
190
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
!
Despite our careful design of the product,
small scratches that do not affect actual
operation may appear on the disc surface
as a result of mechanical wear, ambient
conditions for use or handling of the disc.
This is not a sign of the malfunction of this
Built-in drive and care
!
Use only conventional, fully circular discs.
Do not use shaped discs.
product. Consider it to be normal wear and
tear.
!
!
Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or
otherwise damaged discs as they may da-
mage the built-in drive.
Do not touch the recorded surface of the
discs.
Store discs in their cases when not in use.
Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir-
onments including under direct sunlight.
Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-
micals to the surface of the discs.
To clean a disc, wipe it with a soft cloth,
moving outward from the center.
Playable discs
DVD-Video and CD
DVD and CD discs that display the logos
shown below generally can be played on this
built-in DVD drive.
!
!
DVD-Video
!
!
CD
!
!
Condensation may temporarily impair the
built-in drive’s performance. Leave it to ad-
just to the warmer temperature for about
one hour. Also, wipe any damp discs with a
soft cloth.
Playback of discs may not be possible be-
cause of disc characteristics, disc format,
recorded application, playback environ-
ment, storage conditions and so on.
Road shocks may interrupt disc playback.
Read the precautions for discs before
using them.
p
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.
p It is not possible to play DVD-Audio discs.
This DVD drive may not be able to play all
discs bearing the marks shown above.
!
!
AVCHD recorded discs
This unit is not compatible with discs recorded
in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Defi-
nition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If
inserted, the disc may not be ejected.
Ambient conditions for playing
a disc
!
At extremely high temperatures, a tempera-
ture cutout protects this product by switch-
ing it off automatically.
191
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Playing DualDisc
Detailed information for
playable media
Compatibility
!
DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a
recordable CD for audio on one side and a
recordable DVD for video on the other.
Playback of the DVD side is possible with
this navigation system. However, since the
CD side of DualDiscs is not physically com-
patible with the general CD standard, it
may not be possible to play the CD side
with this navigation system.
!
Common notes about disc compatibility
!
!
!
!
Certain functions of this product may not
be available for some discs.
Compatibility with all discs is not guaran-
teed.
It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/
DVD-RAM discs.
Playback of discs may become impossible
with direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-
peratures, or depending on the storage
conditions in the vehicle.
!
!
Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual-
Disc may result in scratches to the disc.
Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-
blems on this navigation system. In some
cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in
the disc loading slot and will not eject. To
prevent this, we recommend you refrain
from using DualDisc with this navigation
system.
DVD-Video discs
!
DVD-Video discs that have incompatible re-
gion numbers cannot be played on this
DVD drive. The region number of the player
can be found on this product’s chassis.
!
Please refer to the manufacturer for more
detailed information about DualDiscs.
Dolby Digital
DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-R DL (Dual
Layer) discs
AVIC-Z110BT will down-mix Dolby Digital sig-
nals internally and the sound will be output in
stereo. (Equipped with optical output for fu-
ture extension.)
p Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
!
Unfinalized discs which have been re-
corded with the Video format (video mode)
cannot be played back.
!
Discs which have been recorded with the
Video Recording format (VR mode) can be
played back. However, unfinalized discs
may not be played back. Unplayable discs
should be finalized.
!
!
!
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs which have
been recorded with Layer Jump recording
cannot be played back.
For more information about recording
mode, please contact the manufacturer of
media, recorders, or writing software.
The following logo indicates that this unit is
compatible with DVD-RW discs which have
been recorded with the Video Recording
format (VR mode).
DTS sound
DTS audio cannot be output, so select an
audio setting other than DTS.
“DTS” is registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.
192
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
vice (USB, SD) with complex folder hierar-
chies.
!
!
Operations may vary depending on the
kind of an external storage device (USB,
SD).
It may not be possible to play some music
files from SD or USB because of file char-
acteristics, file format, recorded applica-
tion, playback environment, storage
conditions, and so on.
CD-R/CD-RW discs
!
!
Unfinalized discs cannot be played back.
It may not be possible to play back CD-R/
CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re-
corder or a personal computer because of
disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on
the disc, or dirt, scratches or condensation
on the lens of the built-in drive.
USB storage device compatibility
= For more details about USB storage device
compatibility with this navigation system,
Protocol: bulk
!
Playback of discs recorded on a personal
computer may not be possible, depending
on the recording device, writing software,
their settings, and other environmental fac-
tors.
Please record with the correct format. (For
more details, please contact manufacturer
of media, recorders, or writing software.)
Titles and other text information recorded
on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis-
played by this product (in the case of audio
data (CD-DA)).
!
!
!
You cannot connect a USB storage device
to this navigation system via a USB hub.
Partitioned USB memory is not compatible
with this navigation system.
!
!
Firmly secure the USB storage device when
driving. Do not let the USB storage device
fall onto the floor, where it may become
jammed under the brake or gas pedal.
There may be a slight delay when starting
playback of audio files encoded with image
data.
Some USB storage devices connected to
this navigation system may generate noise
on the radio.
!
!
!
!
Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW
discs before using them.
Common notes about the external
storage device (USB, SD)
!
Do not connect anything other than the
USB memory device.
Do not leave the external storage device
(USB, SD) in any location with high tem-
peratures.
Depending on the kind of the external sto-
rage device (USB, SD) you use, this naviga-
tion system may not recognize the storage
device or files may not be played back prop-
erly.
The text information of some audio and
video files may not be correctly displayed.
File extensions must be used properly.
There may be a slight delay when starting
playback of files on an external storage de-
The sequence of audio files on USB mem-
ory
For USB memory, the sequence is different
from that of USB memory device.
!
SD memory card and SDHC memory card
!
For more details about SD memory card
compatibility with this navigation system,
!
!
!
193
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
!
!
Up to 255 subtitle files may be used. Any
more subtitle files will not be recognized.
Up to 64 characters can be used for the
name of the subtitle file, including the ex-
tension. If more than 64 characters are
used for the file name, the subtitle file may
not be recognized.
Handling guidelines and
supplemental information
!
This system is not compatible with Multi
Media Card (MMC).
!
Copyright protected files cannot be played
back.
!
The character code for the subtitle file
should comply with ISO-8859-1. Using char-
acters other than ISO-8859-1 may cause the
characters to be displayed incorrectly.
The subtitles may not be displayed correctly
if the displayed characters in the subtitle
file include control code.
For materials that use a high transfer rate,
the subtitles and video may not be comple-
tely synchronized.
Notes specific to DivX files
!
Only DivX files downloaded from DivX part-
ner sites are guarantee for proper opera-
tion. Unauthorized DivX files may not
operate properly.
!
!
!
!
!
DRM rental files cannot be operated until
playing back is started.
The navigation system corresponds to a
DivX file display of up to 1 590 minutes 43
seconds. Search operations beyond this
time limit are prohibited.
If multiple subtitles are programed to dis-
play within a very short time frame, such as
0.1 seconds, the subtitles may not be dis-
played at the correct time.
!
DivX VOD file playback requires supplying
the ID code of this navigation system to the
DivX VOD provider. Regarding the ID code,
refer to Making a phone call using the re-
!
!
Plays all versions of DivX video (including
DivX 6) with standard playback of DivX
media files.
For more details about DivX, visit the follow-
ing site:
http://www.divx.com/
DivX subtitle files
!
Srt format subtitle files with the extension
“.srt” can be used.
!
Only one subtitle file can be used for each
DivX file. Multiple subtitle files cannot be
associated.
!
!
Subtitle files that are named with the same
character string as the DivX file before the
extension are associated with the DivX file.
The character strings before the extension
must be exactly the same. However, if there
is only one DivX file and one subtitle file in
a single folder, the files are associated even
if the file names are not the same.
The subtitle file must be stored in the same
folder as the DivX file.
194
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Media compatibility chart
General
DVD-R/-RW/-R
DL
USB storage de-
vice
Media
CD-R/-RW
SD memory card
ISO9660 level 1,
ISO9660 level 2,
Romeo, Joliet
and UDF 1.02
ISO9660 level 1,
ISO9660 level 2,
Romeo and Joliet
File system
FAT16/FAT32
Maximum number of
folders
700
300
Maximum number of
files
999
3 500
2 500
MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, AVI, WMV,
MPEG-4
Playable file types
MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX
Notes:
Maximum playback time of audio file stored in the external storage device (USB, SD): 7.5 h (450 minutes)
MP3 compatibility
DVD-R/-RW/-R
DL
USB storage de-
vice
Media
CD-R/-RW
SD memory card
File extension
Bit rate
.mp3
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
for emphasis)
Sampling frequency
8 kHz to 48 kHz
ID3 tag
ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3
ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4
Notes:
!
!
Ver. 2.x of ID3 Tag is given priority when both Ver. 1.x and Ver. 2.x exist.
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:
MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO, m3u playlist
WMA compatibility
DVD-R/-RW/-R
DL
USB storage de-
vice
Media
CD-R/-RW
.wma
SD memory card
File extension
Bit rate
5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
8 kHz to 48 kHz
Sampling frequency
Note:
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional, Lossless, Voice
195
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
WAV compatibility
DVD-R/-RW/-R
DL
USB storage de-
vice
Media
CD-R/-RW
SD memory card
File extension
Format
.wav
Linear PCM (LPCM), IMA-ADPCM
WAV files on the CD-R/-RW, DVD-R/-RW/-R
DL cannot be played.
LPCM: 16 kHz to 48 kHz
IMA-ADPCM: 22.05 kHz and 44.1 kHz
Sampling frequency
LPCM: 8 bits and 16 bits
MS ADPCM: 4 bits
Quantization bits
Note:
The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded.
AAC compatibility
DVD-R/-RW/-R
DL
USB storage de-
vice
Media
CD-R/-RW
SD memory card
File extension
Bit rate
.m4a
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR)
8 kHz to 44.1 kHz
Sampling frequency
Note:
8 kHz to 18 kHz
The navigation system plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes.
196
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
DivX compatibility
DVD-R/-RW/-R
DL
USB storage de-
vice
Media
CD-R/-RW
SD memory card
File extension
Profile (DivX version)
.avi/.divx
Home Theater Ver. 3.11/Ver. 4.x/Ver. 5.x/
Ver. 6.x
Compatible audio codec MP3, Dolby Digital
DivX files on the external storage device
(USB, SD) cannot be played.
Bit rate (MP3)
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
Sampling frequency
(MP3)
16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
for emphasis)
Maximum image size
Maximum file size
Notes:
720 pixels × 576 pixels
4 GB
!
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:
DivX Ultra format, DivX files without video data, DivX files encoded with LPCM (Linear PCM) audio codec
Depending on the file information composition, such as the number of audio streams, there may be a slight
delay in the start of playback on discs.
!
!
!
!
If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback stops before the end.
Some special operations may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files.
Files with high transfer rates may not be played back correctly. The standard transfer rate is 4 Mbps for CDs and
10.08 Mbps for DVDs.
Video files compatibility (USB, SD)
File extension
.avi
.mp4
.m4v
.wmv
Format
MPEG-4
MPEG-4
H.264
H.264
MPEG-4
WMV
Compatible video
codec
MPEG-4
MPEG-4
MPEG-4
WMV
Linear PCM
(LPCM), IMA-
ADPCM
Compatible audio
codec
AAC
AAC
AAC
WMA
MP3
Image size:
QVGA (320 pix-
els x 240 pixels)
Bit rate:
Image size:
QVGA (320 pix-
els x 240 pixels)
Bit rate:
Image size:
QVGA (320 pix-
els x 240 pixels)
Bit rate:
Image size:
QVGA (320 pix-
els x 240 pixels)
Bit rate:
Image size:
QVGA (320 pix-
els x 240 pixels)
Bit rate:
Recommended
video specifications
768 kbps
768 kbps
384 kbps
768 kbps
384 kbps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Maximum file size
2 GB
Maximum playback
time
150 minutes
197
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Common notes
Example of a hierarchy
!
The navigation system may not operate cor-
rectly, depending on the application used
to encode WMA files.
Depending on the version of Windows
Media Player used to encode WMA files,
album names and other text information
may not be correctly displayed.
The following figure is an example of the tier
structure in the disc. The numbers in the fig-
ure indicate the order in which folder numbers
are assigned and the order to be played back.
: Folder
!
: File
!
There may be a slight delay when starting
playback of audio files encoded with image
data.
1
2
!
!
The navigation system is not compatible
with packet write data transfer.
This navigation system can recognize up to
32 characters, beginning with the first char-
acter, including extension for the file and
folder name. Depending on the display
area, the navigation system may try to dis-
play them with a reduced font size. How-
ever, the maximum number of the
characters that you can display varies ac-
cording to the width of each character, and
of the display area.
Folder selection sequence or other opera-
tions may be altered, depending on the en-
coding or writing software.
Regardless of the length of blank section
between the songs of original recording,
compressed audio discs play with a short
pause between songs.
3
4
5
6
Level 1
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Notes
!
!
This product assigns folder numbers. The user
cannot assign folder numbers.
!
!
If there is a folder that does not contain any
playable file, the folder itself will display in the
folder list but you cannot check any files in
the folder. (A blank list will appear.) Also,
these folders will be skipped without display-
ing the folder number.
Bluetooth
198
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Bluetooth is a short-range wireless radio con-
nectivity technology that is developed as a
cable replacement for cellular phones, hand-
held PCs and other devices. Bluetooth oper-
ates in 2.4 GHz frequency range and transmits
voice and data at speeds up to 1 megabit per
second. Bluetooth was launched by a special
interest group (SIG) comprising Ericsson Inc.,
Intel Corp., Nokia Corp., Toshiba and IBM in
1998, and it is currently developed by nearly
2 000 companies worldwide.
HD Radio Technology
HD Radioä and the HD Radio Ready logo are
proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corporation.
SD and SDHC logo
!
The Bluetoothâ word mark and logos are re-
gistered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Pioneer Corporation is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of
their respective owners.
SD Logo is a trademark.
About the SAT RADIO
READY Logo
SDHC Logo is a trademark.
WMA/WMV
The SAT RADIO READY logo indicates that the
Satellite Radio Tuner for Pioneer (i. e., XM
tuner and Sirius satellite tuner which are sold
separately) can be controlled by this naviga-
tion system. Please inquire with your dealer or
nearest authorized Pioneer service station re-
garding the satellite radio tuner that can be
connected to this navigation system.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra-
demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Note:
The system will use direct satellite-to-receiver
broadcasting technology to provide listeners
in their cars and at home with crystal-clear
sound seamlessly from coast to coast. Satel-
lite radio will create and package over 100
channels of digital- quality music, news,
sports, talk and children’s programming.
“SAT Radio”, the SAT Radio logo and all re-
lated marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite
Radio inc., and XM Satellite Radio Inc.
DivX
199
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
DivX is a compressed digital video format cre-
ated by the DivX video codec from DivX, Inc.
This unit can play DivX video files recorded on
CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs.
Keeping the same terminology as DVD video,
individual DivX video files are called “Titles”.
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW or a
DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind
that by default they will be played in alphabeti-
cal order.
iPod
“Made for iPod” means that an electronic ac-
cessory has been designed to connect specifi-
cally to iPod and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance stan-
dards.
Plays DivXâ video.
p DivXâ is a registered trademark of DivX,
Inc., and is used under license.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
AAC
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and
refers to an audio compression technology
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Sev-
eral applications can be used to encode AAC
files, but file formats and extensions differ de-
pending on the application which is used to
encode. This unit plays back AAC files en-
coded by iTunes version 7.7.
iPhone
Detailed information
regarding connectable iPods
“Works with iPhone” means that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect spe-
cifically to iPhone and has been certified by
the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards.
CAUTION
!
!
Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost
from an iPod, even if that data is lost while
using the navigation system.
Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for ex-
tended amounts of time. Extended exposure
to direct sunlight can result in iPod malfunc-
tion due to the resulting high temperature.
Do not leave the iPod in any location with
high temperatures.
Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not
let the iPod fall onto the floor, where it may be-
come jammed under the brake or gas pedal.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
!
!
iTunes
iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
For details, refer to the iPod’s manuals.
200
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
video in the form of disturbances such as
spots or colored stripes.
Using the LCD screen correctly
Handling the LCD screen
!
When the LCD screen is subjected to direct
sunlight for a long period of time, it will be-
come very hot, resulting in possible da-
mage to the LCD screen. When not using
this navigation system, avoid exposing it to
direct sunlight as much as possible.
The LCD screen should be used within the
Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures
higher or lower than the operating tem-
perature range, because the LCD screen
may not operate normally and could be da-
maged.
The LCD screen is exposed in order to in-
crease its visibility within the vehicle.
Please do not press strongly on it as this
may damage it.
Do not push the LCD screen with excessive
force as this may scratch it.
Maintaining the LCD screen
!
When removing dust from the LCD screen
or cleaning it, first turn the system power
off, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.
!
When wiping the LCD screen, take care not
to scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or
abrasive chemical cleaners.
!
!
LED (light-emitting diode)
backlight
A light emitting diode is used inside the dis-
play to illuminate the LCD screen.
!
At low temperatures, using the LED back-
light may increase image lag and degrade
the image quality because of the character-
istics of the LCD screen. Image quality will
improve with an increase in temperature.
The product lifetime of the LED backlight is
more than 10 000 hours. However, it may
decrease if used in high temperatures.
If the LED backlight reaches the end of its
product lifetime, the screen will become
dimmer and the image will no longer be
visible. In that case, please consult your
dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER
Service Station.
!
!
!
!
!
Never touch the LCD screen with anything
besides your finger when operating the
Touch panel functions. The LCD screen can
scratch easily.
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen
!
If the LCD screen is near the vent of an air
conditioner, make sure that air from the air
conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from
the heater may break the LCD screen, and
cool air from the cooler may cause moist-
ure to form inside the navigation unit, re-
sulting in possible damage.
!
Small black dots or white dots (bright dots)
may appear on the LCD screen. These are
due to the characteristics of the LCD
screen and do not indicate a malfunction.
The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is
exposed to direct sunlight.
When using a cellular phone, keep the an-
tenna of the cellular phone away from the
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the
!
!
201
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Display information
Destination Menu
Phone Menu
Page
55
Page
82
[Address]
[Dial Pad]
[Return Home]
[POI]
57
[Call Home]
83
[Contacts]
83
[Gas Station]
[ATM]
[Contacts Transfer]
[Received Calls]
[Dialed Calls]
[Missed Calls]
[GOOG-411]
87
83
[Coffee]
84
[Hotel]
84
[Spell Name]
[Near Me]
58
85
58
[Near Destination]
[Around City]
[AVIC FEEDS]
[Favorites]
[History]
59
Settings Menu
59
60
54
[Cancel Route]
[MSN Direct]
[Coordinates]
[Route Overview]
66
60
52
Page
92
[Navi Settings]
[System Settings]
[AV Settings]
96
160
163
42
[AV Sound]
[Map Settings]
[Bluetooth Settings]
[Setting Replicator]
87
101
202
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
System Settings menu
Navi Settings menu
Page
[Regional Settings]
Page
92
[Program Language], [Voice Lan-
guage]
[Connection Status]
[3D Calibration Status]
[Gas Mileage]
92
[Time]
97
94
[km / mile]
[Speed]
98
[Drive Log Settings]
[Demo Mode]
95
98
96
[Volume]
98
[Set Home]
96
[Splash Screen]
99
[Modify Current Location]
96
[Back Camera]
99
[Screen Calibration]
[Illumi Color]
[Service Information]
[Restore Factory Settings]
203
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Map Settings menu
AV System Settings menu
Page
Page
160
160
160
161
161
161
162
162
162
163
[Displayed Info]
[Close Up View]
[City Map]
[AV1 Input]
[AV2 Input]
[ANT CTRL]
42
42
42
43
43
43
43
43
43
44
47
44
45
46
47
46
[City Map Barrier]
[Show Traffic Incident]
[Bluetooth Connected]
[Current Street Name]
[Favorites Icon]
[Wide Mode]
[Rear SP]
[Mute]
[Mute Level]
[Guidance/Tel SP]
[VR Catalog Menu]
[DivX VOD]
[3D Land Mark]
[Show Manuever]
[MSN Direct]
[Quick Access Selection]
[Overlay POI]
[View Mode]
[Day/Night Display]
[AV Guide Mode]
[Road Color]
204
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
AV Sound Settings menu
Bluetooth Settings menu
Page
Page
80
[FAD/BAL] ([Balance])
[EQ]
[Connection]
[Registration]
77
[Loudness]
[Sub Woofer]
[HPF]
[Device Name]
88
[Password]
88
[Bluetooth On/Off]
[Echo Cancel]
88
[SLA]
88
[Bass Booster]
[Staging]
[Auto Answer Preference]
[Refuse All Calls]
[Clear Memory]
[Firmware update]
88
89
89
89
205
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
DivX
Glossary
DivX is a popular media technology created by
DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com-
pressed video with high visual quality that
maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files
can also include advanced media features like
menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks.
Many DivX media files are available for down-
load online, and you can create your own
using your personal content and easy-to-use
tools from DivX.com.
AAC
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and
refers to an audio compression technology
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4.
Aspect ratio
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.
A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of
16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional
presence and atmosphere.
DivX Certified
DivX Certified products are officially tested by
the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all
versions of DivX video, including DivX 6.
Bit rate
This expresses data volume per second, or bps
units (bits per second). The higher the rate,
the more information is available to reproduce
the sound. Using the same encoding method
(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better
the sound.
Favorites
A frequently visited location (such as your
workplace or a relative’s home) that you can
register to allow easy routing.
Built-in sensor
The built-in sensor that enables the system to
estimate your vehicle’s position.
GPS
Global Positioning System. A network of satel-
lites that provides navigation signals for a vari-
ety of purposes.
CD-DA
This stands for a general music CD (commer-
cial-release audio CD). In this manual, this
word is sometime used for a distinction be-
tween data CDs (which include compressed
audio files) and general music CDs.
Guidance mode
The mode in which guidance is given as you
drive to your destination; the system automati-
cally switches to this mode as soon as a route
has been set.
Chapter
Guidance point
Titles of DVD-Video or DVD-VR are in turn di-
vided into chapters which are numbered in
the same way as the chapters of a book. With
discs featuring chapters, you can quickly find
a desired scene with chapter search.
These are important landmarks along your
route, generally intersections. The next gui-
dance point along your route is indicated on
the map by the yellow flag icon.
Home location
Your registered home location.
Current location
The present location of your vehicle; your cur-
rent location is shown on the map by a red tri-
angle mark.
Destination
A location you choose as the end point of your
journey.
206
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
ID3 tag
MPEG
This is a method of embedding track-related
information in an MP3 file. This embedded in-
formation can include the track title, the ar-
tist’s name, the album title, the music genre,
the year of production, comments and other
data. The contents can be freely edited using
software with ID3 Tag editing functions.
Although the tags are restricted by the num-
ber of characters, the information can be
viewed when the track is played back.
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts
Group, and is an international video image
compression standard.
Multi-angle
With regular TV programs, although multiple
cameras are used to simultaneously shoot
scenes, only images from one camera at a
time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs
feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-
ting you choose your viewing angle as desired.
ISO9660 format
Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)
Some videos feature dialog recorded in multi-
ple languages or audio recorded in multiple
tracks. For example, dialog in up to 8 lan-
guages can be recorded on a single DVD-Vi-
deo, letting you choose the language as
desired.
This is the international standard for the for-
mat logic of DVD/CD-ROM folders and files.
For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations
for the following two levels:
!
Level 1:
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name
consists of up to 8 characters, half-byte
English capital letters, half-byte numerals
and the “_” sign, with a file-extension of
three characters).
Multi-session
Multi-session is a recording method that al-
lows additional data to be recorded later.
When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or
CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is
treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses-
sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses-
sions in one disc.
!
!
Level 2:
The file name can have up to 31 characters
(including the separation mark “.” and a file
extension). Each folder contains less than 8
hierarchies.
Extended formats
Joliet:
Multi-subtitle
File names can have up to 64 characters.
Romeo:
File names can have up to 128 characters.
For example, subtitles in up to 32 languages
can be recorded on a single DVD-Video, letting
you choose as desired.
JPEG
Packet write
This stands for Joint Photographic Experts
Group, and is an international still image com-
pression standard.
This is a general term for a method of writing
individual files to a CD-R, etc. whenever re-
quired, just as is done with files on floppy or
hard disks.
MP3
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an
audio compression standard established by a
working group (MPEG) of the ISO (Interna-
tional Standards Organization). MP3 is able to
compress audio data to about 1/10th the size
of a conventional disc.
207
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Parental lock
Track log
Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-or-
iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-
vents children from viewing such scenes. With
this kind of disc, if you set the unit’s parental
lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for
children will be disabled, or these scenes will
be skipped.
Your navigation system logs routes that you al-
ready passed through if the track logger is ac-
tivated. This recorded route is called a “track
log”. It is handy when you want to check a
route traveled or if returning along a complex
route.
VBR
Phone book
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally
speaking, CBR (constant bit rate) is more
widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit
rate according to the needs of audio compres-
sion, it is possible to achieve compression-
priority sound quality.
An address book on user’s phone is collec-
tively referred to as “Phone book”. Depending
on the cellular phone, the “Phone book” may
be called a name such as “Contacts”, “Busi-
ness card” or something else.
Point of Interest (POI)
Voice guidance
Point Of Interest; any of a range of locations
stored in the data, such as railway stations,
shops, restaurants, and amusement parks.
The giving of directions by navigation voice
while in guidance.
Waypoint
Region number
A location that you choose to visit before your
destination; a journey can be built up from
multiple waypoints and the destination.
DVD players and DVD discs feature region
numbers indicating the area in which they
were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-
sible unless it features the same region num-
ber as the DVD player.
WMA
WMA is short for Windows Mediaä Audio and
refers to an audio compression technology
that is developed by Microsoft Corporation.
Route setting
The process of determining the ideal route to a
specific location; route setting is done auto-
matically by the system when you specify a
destination.
Set route
The route marked out by the system to your
destination. It is highlighted in bright color on
the map.
Title
DVD-Video or DVD-VR discs have a high data
capacity, enabling recording of multiple videos
on a single disc. If, for example, one disc con-
tains three separate videos, they are divided
into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy
the convenience of title search and other func-
tions.
208
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Audio
Specifications
Maximum power output ....... 50 W × 4
General
50 W × 2 ch/4 W + 70 W ×
Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC
1 ch/2 W (for subwoofer)
Continuous power output ... 22 W × 4 (50 Hz to 15 kHz,
5 %THD, 4 W LOAD, Both
(allowable voltage range:
10.8 V to 15.1 V DC)
Grounding system ................... Negative type
Channels Driven)
Maximum current consumption
........................................... 10.0 A
Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 W to 8 W [2 W for 1 ch]
allowable)
Dimensions (W × H × D):
Preout output level (max) .... 4 V
Preout impedance .................. 100 ohm
Equalizer (7-Band Graphic Equalizer):
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/125 Hz/315 Hz/800 Hz/
2 kHz/5 kHz/12.5 kHz
Chassis ............................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×
165 mm
(7 in. × 3-7/8 in. × 6-1/2 in.)
Nose ..................................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 17 mm
(6-3/4 in. × 3-3/4 in. ×
Gain ...................................... 12 dB
Loudness contour:
5/8 in.)
Weight .......................................... 2.43 kg (5.3 lbs)
NAND flash memory ............. 4 GB
Low ....................................... +3.5 dB (100 Hz), +3 dB
(10 kHz)
Mid ....................................... +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB
(10 kHz)
High ..................................... +11 dB (100 Hz), +11 dB
(10 kHz)
Navigation
GPS Receiver:
System ................................ L1, C/Acode GPS
SPS (Standard Positioning
Service)
(volume: –30 dB)
HPF:
Reception system .......... 32-channel multi-channel
reception system
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/
125 Hz
Reception frequency .... 1 575.42 MHz
Sensitivity .......................... -143 dBm (typ)
Position update frequency
........................................... Approx. once per second
GPS antenna:
Slope .................................... –12 dB/oct
Subwoofer:
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/
125 Hz
Slope .................................... –18 dB/oct
Gain ...................................... –24/+6 dB
Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse
Bass boost:
Antenna ............................. Micro strip flat antenna/
right-handed helical polari-
zation
Antenna cable ................. 5.0 m (16 ft. 5 in.)
Dimensions (W × H × D)
........................................... 33 mm × 15 mm × 36 mm
(1-1/4 in. × 5/8 in. ×
Gain ...................................... 0 dB to +12 dB
DVD Drive
System .......................................... DVD-Video, CD, MP3, WMA,
AAC, DivX system
1-3/8 in.)
Weight ................................ 96 g (0.2 lbs)
Usable discs .............................. DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DVD-R
(DL), DVD-RW, CD-ROM,
Display
CD-DA, CD-R/RW
Region number ........................ 1
Signal format:
Screen size/aspect ratio ....... 7 inch wide/16:9
(effective display area:
159 mm × 84 mm)
Sampling frequency ..... 44.1 kHz/48 kHz/96 kHz
Number of quantization bits
........................................... 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit; linear
Frequency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD,
at sampling frequency
Pixels ............................................. 384 000 (800 × 480)
Display method ........................ TFT Active matrix driving
Backlight ..................................... LED
Color system .............................. NTSC compatible
Tolerable temperature range:
96 kHz)
Power on ............................ +14 °F to +140 °F
Power off ............................ –4 °F to +176 °F
Angle adjustment .................... 0° to 22°
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 97 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net-
work)
(CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A
network))
209
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Appendix
Dynamic range ......................... 95 dB (1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB
(1 kHz))
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 62 dB (IHF-A network)
CEA2006 Specifications
Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz)
Output level:
Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W ( 0.2 V)
Audio ................................... 1.0 V (1 kHz, 0 dB)
Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo)
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3
WMA decoding format ......... Ver.9.0 L3
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (only encoded
by iTunes):
Power output ............................. 14 W RMS × 4 Channels
(4 W and ≦ 1 % THD+N)
S/N ratio ....................................... 91 dBA (reference: 1 W into
.m4a
DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver.3.11,
Ver.4.X, Ver.5.X, Ver.6.X :
4 W)
.avi, .divx
Note
USB
Specifications and design are subject to possible
modifications without notice due to im-
provements.
USB standard spec. ............... USB 2.0 High Speed
Max current supply ................. 500 mA
Max memory capacity ........... 16 GB
File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32
USB class .................................... Mass storage class
Decoding format ...................... MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/
H.264/MPEG4/WMV
SD
Compatible physical format
..................................................... Version 2.00
Max memory capacity ........... 16 GB
File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32
Decoding format ...................... MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/
H.264/MPEG4/WMV
Bluetooth
Version .......................................... Bluetooth 2.0+EDR
Output power ............................ +4 dBm Max.
(Power class 2)
FM tuner
Frequency range ...................... 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz
Usable sensitivity ..................... 9 dBf (0.8 µV/75 W, mono,
S/N: 30 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 72 dB (IHF-A network)
Distortion ..................................... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,
stereo)
0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,
mono)
Frequency response ............... 30 Hz to 15 000 Hz ( 3 dB)
Stereo separation .................... 45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz)
AM tuner
Frequency range ...................... 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
(10 kHz)
Usable sensitivity ..................... 25 µV (S/N: 20 dB)
210
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU
TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.
TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936
TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia
TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada
TEL: 1-877-283-5901
TEL: 905-479-4411
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000
TEL: 55-9178-4270
先鋒股份有限公司
總公司 : 台北市中山北路二段44號13樓
電話 : (02) 2521-3588
先鋒電子(香港)有限公司
香港九龍尖沙咀海港城世界商業中心9樓901-6室
電話 : (0852) 2848-6488
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2009 by Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
Printed in Thailand
<KMZZX> <09G00000>
<CRB3035-B/N> UC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|